Instruction Book

M-3425
Generator Protection
 PROTECTION

Generator Protection
M‑3425
Integrated Protection System®
for Generators of All Sizes

Unit shown with optional M‑3925 Target Module and M‑3931 HMI
(Human‑Machine Interface) Module

• Provides all major protective functions for generator protection,

including Field Ground (64F), Out-of-Step (78), and Split-Phase
Differential (50DT)
• Expanded IPScom® Communications Software provides
simple and logical setting and programming
• Enhanced "pick and choose" functionality provides
tailored applications at the lowest possible cost
M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

Standard Protective Functions • Removable printed circuit board and power

• Dual‑zone phase distance protection for phase supply
fault backup (21) • Both 50 and 60 Hz models available
• Overexcitation (V/Hz) protection (24) • Both 1A and 5 A rated CT inputs available
• Phase Undervoltage (27) protection • Additional trip inputs for externally connected
• 100% Stator Ground Fault protection via third devices
harmonic neutral undervoltage (27TN) • IRIG-B time synchronization
• Sensitive dual‑setpoint Reverse Power, Low • Operating Temperature: –20° C to +70° C
Forward Power or Overpower detection, one of
which can be used for sequential tripping (32)
Optional Features
• Dual‑zone, offset‑mho Loss-of-Field protection (40)
• Redundant power supply
• Sensitive Negative Sequence Overcurrent
protection and alarm (46) • M‑3925 Target Module
• Instantaneous Overcurrent (50) protection • M‑3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module
• Inadvertent Generator Energizing protection • M‑3801D IPSplot® PLUS Oscillograph Analysis
(50/27) Software
• Generator Breaker Failure protection (50BF)
• Definite Time Overcurrent (50DT) can be used
for split phase differential
• Instantaneous Overcurrent (50N) protection
• Neutral Inverse Time Overcurrent (51N)
• Three-phase Inverse Time Overcurrent (51V)
• Phase Overvoltage (59)
• Generator Ground Fault protection (59N)
• VT Fuse‑Loss detection and blocking (60FL)
• Out‑of‑Step protection (78)
• Four‑step Over/Underfrequency (81) protection
• Two-step Rate of Change of Frequency (81R)
• Generator Phase Differential protection (87)
• Ground Differential (87GD) protection
• External Function allows external devices to trip
through M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

Optional Protective Functions

• Stator Thermal protection using positive
sequence inverse time overcurrent (51T)
• Field Ground protection (64F)
Standard Features
• E i g h t p r o gra m m a bl e o u t p u t s a n d s i x
programmable inputs
• Oscillography recording
• Time-stamped target storage for 24 events
• Metering of all measured parameters
• Three communications ports (two RS-232 and
one RS-485)
• M‑3820C IPScom® Communications Software
• Includes MODBUS and BECO 2200 protocols
• Standard 19" rack-mount design

–2–
 M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

STANDARD PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Device Setpoint
Number Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Phase Distance (dual-zone mho characteristic)

Circle Diameter #1, #2 0.1 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%

(0.5 to 500.0 Ω) (0.5 Ω or 5%)
Offset #1, #2 –100.0 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%
21
(–500.0 to 500.0 Ω) (0.5 Ω or 5%)
Impedance Angle #1, #2 0° to 90° 1° 1°
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Volts / Hz

Definite Time
Pickup #1, #2 100 to 200% 1% 1%
Time Delay #1, #2 30 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 25 Cycles
24
Inverse Time
Characteristic Curves Inverse Time #1–#4 — —
Pickup 100 to 200% 1% 1%
Time Dial:  Curve #1 1 to 100 1
Time Dial:  Curves #2–#4 0.0 to 9.0 0.1
Reset Rate 1 to 999 Sec. 1 Sec. .02 Sec. or 1%
(from threshold of trip)
The percent pickup is based on nominal VT secondary voltage and nominal system frequency settings. The pickup
accuracy stated is only applicable from 10 to 80 Hz, 0 to 180 V, 100 to 150% V/Hz and a nominal voltage setting of
120 V.

Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral

27 Pickup #1, #2 0.3 to 20.0 V 0.1 V 0.15 V or 1%

TN Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
27 Undervoltage Inhibit #1,#2 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
(positive sequence)
32
Underpower Inhibit #1,#2 0.002 to 3.000 PU 0.001 PU 0.002 or 2%

RMS Undervoltage

27 Pickup #1, #2 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%

0.8 V or 0.75%*
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 0.5%**
* When both RMS and Line‑Ground to Line‑Line is selected.
** When RMS (total waveform) is selected, timing accuracy is +20 cycles or 1%†.

Directional Power

Pickup #1, #2 –3.000 to +3.000 PU 0.001 PU 0.002 PU or 2%

32
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle +16 Cycles or 1%
The per-unit pickup is based on nominal VT secondary voltage and nominal CT secondary current settings. The 32
function can be selected as low forward power, reverse power, or overpower function.

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values.      Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating.
–3–
M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

STANDARD PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS (cont.)

Device Setpoint
Number Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Loss of Field (dual-zone offset-mho characteristic)

Circle Diameter #1, #2 0.1 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%

(0.5 to 500.0 Ω) (0.5 Ω or 5%)
Offset #1, #2 –50.0 to 50.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%
(–250.0 to 250.0 Ω) (0.5 Ω or 5%)
40 Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Voltage Control 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
(positive sequence)
Directional Element Fixed at –13° ­— ­—
Voltage control for each zone can be individually enabled.

Negative Sequence Overcurrent

Definite Time
Pickup 3 to 100% 1% 0.5% of 5 A
(0.5% of 1 A)
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Inverse Time
Pickup 3 to 100% 1% 0.5 % of 5 A
(0.5% of 1 A)
46 Time Dial Setting 1 to 95 1 3 Cycles or 3%
(K= I22t)
Definite Maximum
Time to Trip 600 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle 1%
Definite Minimum Time 12 Cycles ­— fixed
Reset Time (Linear) 4 minutes — —
(from threshold of trip)
Pickup is based on the generator nominal current setting.

Breaker Failure

50 Pickup
BF-Ph
Phase Current 0.10 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%
50
(0.02 to 2.00 A) (0.02 A or 2%)
BF-N
BF 50
Neutral Current 0.10 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%
(0.02 to 2.00 A) (0.02 A or 2%)
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
50BF can be initiated from designated M‑3425 output contacts or programmable inputs.

Instantaneous Overcurrent

Pickup 0.1 to 240.0 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 3%

50
(0.1 to 48.0 A) (0.02 A or 3%)
Trip Time Response < 2 Cycles

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values.      Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating.
–4–
 M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

STANDARD PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS (cont.)

Device Setpoint
Number Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Instantaneous Overcurrent, Neutral

Pickup 0.1 to 240.0 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 3%

50N (0.02 A or 3%)

(0.1 to 48.0 A)
Trip Time Response < 2 Cycles

Definite Time Overcurrent

Pickup Phase A #1, #2 0.20 A to 240.00 A 0.01 0.1 A or 3%

(0.04 A to 48.00 A) (0.02 A or 3%)
50
DT Pickup Phase B #1, #2 (same as above)
Pickup Phase C #1, #2 (same as above)
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
When 50DT function is used for split-phase differential protection, 50BF, 87, and 87GD functions are not available.

Inadvertent Energizing

Overcurrent 
50 Pickup 0.5 to 15.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%
(0.1 to 3.00 A) (0.02 A or 2%)
50/
27
Undervoltage 
27 Pickup 40 to 130 V 1 V 0.5 V
Pick-up Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Drop-out Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent

Pickup 0.25 to 12.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 1%

(0.05 to 2.40 A) (0.02 A or 1%)
51N Characteristic Curve Definite Time/Inverse/Very Inverse/Extremely Inverse/IEC Curves
Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3% or 3 Cycles
0.05 to 1.10 (IEC curves) 0.01

Inverse Time Overcurrent, with Voltage Control or Voltage Restraint

Pickup 0.5 to 12.0 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 1%

(0.10 to 2.40 A) (0.02 A or 1%)
Characteristic Curve Definite Time/Inverse/Very Inverse/Extremely Inverse/IEC Curves
Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3% or 3 Cycles
51V
0.05 to 1.10 (IEC curves) 0.01
Voltage Control (VC) 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
or
Voltage Restraint (VR) Linear Restraint — —

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values.      Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating.
–5–
M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

STANDARD PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS (cont.)

Device Setpoint
Number Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†

RMS Overvoltage

Pickup #1, #2 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%

59
0.8 V to 0.75%*
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%**
* When both RMS and Line‑Ground to Line‑Line is selected.
** When RMS (total waveform) is selected, timing accuracy is +20 cycles or 1%.

RMS Overvoltage, Neutral

Pickup #1, #2 5.0 to 180.0 V 0.1 V 0.5 V to 0.5%

59N
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

VT Fuse-Loss Detection

A VT fuse-loss condition is detected by using the positive and negative sequence components
60 of the voltages and currents. VT fuse-loss output can be initiated from internally generated logic
FL or from input contacts.
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Out of Step (mho characteristic)

Circle Diameter 0.1 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%

(0.5 to 500.0 Ω) (0.5 Ω or 5%)
Offset –100.0 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%
(–500.0 to 500.0 Ω) (0.5 Ω or 5%)

78 Impedance Angle 0° to 90° 1° 1°
Blinder 0.1 to 50.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%
(0.5 to 250.0 Ω) (0.5 Ω or 5%)
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Trip on mho Exit Enable/Disable
Pole Slip Counter 1 to 20 1
Pole Slip Reset 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Frequency

81 Pickup #1,#2,#3,#4 50.00 to 67.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.02 Hz

40.00 to 57.00 Hz*
Time Delay #1–#4 2 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle 2 Cycles or 1%
The pickup accuracy applies to 60 Hz models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at a range of 47 to 53
Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is 0.1 Hz.
* This range applies to 50 Hz nominal frequency models.

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values.      Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating.
–6–
 M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

STANDARD PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS (cont.)

Device Setpoint
Number Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Rate of Change of Frequency

Pickup #1, #2 0.10 to 20.00 Hz/Sec. 0.01 Hz/Sec. 0.05 Hz/Sec. or 5%
81R Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 20 Cycles
Negative Sequence
Voltage Inhibit 0 to 99% 1% 0.5%

Phase Differential Current

Pickup 0.20 A to 3.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 5%

(0.04 to 0.60 A) (0.02 A or 5%)
87
Percent Slope 1 to 100% 1% 2%
Time Delay* 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
* When a time delay of 1 cycle is selected, the response time is less than 1–1/2 cycles.

Ground (zero sequence) Differential

Pickup 0.20 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 5%

(0.04 to 2.00 A) (0.02 A or 5%)
87
GD Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles* 1 Cycle +1 to -2 Cycles or 1%
CT Ratio Correction (RC) 0.10 to 7.99 0.01
* The Time Delay setting should not be less than 2 cycles.
The 87GD function is provided primarily for low-impedance grounded generator applications. This function operates
as a directional differential. If 3I0 or In is extremely small (less than 0.2 secondary Amps), the
directional element is disabled.

External Functions

EXT Two functions are provided for externally connected devices to trip through the relay to
provide additional logic and target information. Any one or more of the input contacts
(IN1–IN6) can be programmed to activate designated output contacts after a selected time delay.
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Nominal Settings

Nominal Voltage 50 to 140 V 1 V —

Nominal Current 0.50 to 6.00 A 0.01 A —
VT Configuration Line-Line/Line-Ground/
Line-Ground to Line-Line*
Seal-In Delay 2 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
* When Line-Ground to Line-Line is selected, the relay internally calculates the line-line voltage from the line-ground
voltages for all voltage-sensitive functions. This Line-Ground to Line-Line selection should only be used for a VT
nominal secondary voltage of 69 V (not 120 V).

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values.      Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating.
–7–
M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

OPTIONAL PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Device Setpoint
Number Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Inverse Time Positive Sequence Overcurrent (I2t=K), for Stator Thermal Protection
Pickup 0.50 to 15.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A
(0.10 to 3.00 A) (0.02 A)
51T Time Delay @6X* 0.10 to 10.00 Sec 0.01 Sec 3% or 3 Cycles
Reset Characteristics 4 minutes — 3%
(Linear) (from threshold of trip)
* This time delay setting is at six times the pickup current.

Field Ground Protection

Pickup #1, #2 5 to 100 KΩ 1 KΩ 10% or ±1KΩ

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ( IF2 +1) Sec.
64F
Injection Frequency (IF) 0.10 to 1.00 Hz 0.01 Hz
Brush Lift-Off Detection (measuring control circuit)

64B Pickup 0 to 5000 mV 1 mV

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ( IF2 +1) Sec.
When 64F is purchased, an external Coupler Module (M‑3921) is provided for isolation from dc field voltages.
Figure 7, Typical Field Ground Connection Diagram, illustrates a typical connection utilizing the M‑3921 Field
Ground Coupler. Hardware dimensional and mounting information is shown in Figure 8, M‑3921 Field Ground Cou‑
pler Mounting Dimensions.

†
Select the greater of these accuracy values.      Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating.
–8–
 M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

Description
The M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay is suitable for all generator ratings and prime movers. Typical con‑
nection diagrams are illustrated in Figure 2, M‑3425 Typical One-Line Connection Diagram, Figure 3, M‑3425
Typical One-Line Connection Diagram (Configured for Split-Phase Differential), and Figure 4, M‑3425 Typical
Three-Line Connection Diagram.

Configuration Options
The M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay is available with Standard Protective Functions, Optional Protective
Functions, and Optional Features. This provides the user flexibility in selecting a protective system to best suit
the application. The relay may be purchased as a Protection System which includes all Standard Protective
Functions. Additional Optional Protective Functions may be added at the time of purchase at per-function pricing.
The relay may also be purchased as a Base System, with the user selecting any ten (10) Standard Protective
Functions. Additional Standard Functions and/or Premium Protective Functions may be added at the time of
purchase at per-function pricing.
The user can select the Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module, Target Module, or redundant power supply at
time of purchase for either the Protective System or Base System options.
When the user purchases the Field Ground (64F) Premium Protective Function, an external coupler module
(M‑3921) is provided for isolation from the dc field voltages.

Metering
The relay provides metering of voltages (phase, neutral and sequence quantities), currents (phase, neutral and
sequence quantities), real power, reactive power, power factor and impedance measurements.
Metering accuracies are:
Voltage: 0.5 V or 0.5%, whichever is greater
0.8 V or 0.75%, whichever is greater (when both RMS and Line‑Ground to Line‑Line
are selected)
Current: 5 A rating, 0.1 A or 3%, whichever is greater
1 A rating, 0.02 A or 3%, whichever is greater
Power: 0.01 PU or 2%, whichever is greater
Frequency: 0.02 Hz (from 57 to 63 Hz for 60 Hz models; from 47 to 53 Hz for 50 Hz models)

Oscillographic Recorder
The oscillographic recorder provides comprehensive data recording of all monitored waveforms, storing up to
170 cycles of data. The total record length is user-configurable for 1, 2, 3 or 4 partitions. The sampling rate is 16
times the power system nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz). The recorder may be triggered either via the desig‑
nated status inputs, trip outputs, or via serial communications. The recorder continuously stores waveform data,
keeping the most recent data in memory. When triggered, the recorder stores pre-trigger data, then continues
to store data in memory for a user-defined, post-trigger delay period.
The records may be analyzed or viewed using Beckwith Electric M‑3801D IPSplot® PLUS Oscillograph Analysis
software or M‑3813 ComVert software, which converts Beckwith Electric oscillographic files to COMTRADE format.

Target Storage
A total of 24 targets can be stored. The information will include the function(s) operated, the functions picked up,
input/output status, time stamp, and phase and neutral currents at the time of trip.

Calculations
Current and Voltage RMS Values:  Uses discrete Fourier transform algorithm on sampled voltage and current
signals to extract fundamental frequency phasors for relay calculations.  RMS phase voltages for the 59 and
27 functions (when total RMS is selected), and the 24 function are obtained using the time domain approach
to obtain accuracy over a wide frequency band. When the RMS option is selected, the magnitude calculation is
accurate over a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz). When the DFT option is selected, the magnitude calculation
is accurate near nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz).

–9–
M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

Power Input Options

Nominal 110/120/230/240 V ac, 50/60 Hz, or nominal 110/125/220/250 V dc. UL/CSA rating 85 V ac to 265 V ac
and from 80 V dc to 288 V dc. Burden 20 VA at 120 V ac/125 V dc. Withstands 300 V ac or 300 V dc for 1 second.
Nominal 24/48 V dc, operating range from 18 V dc to 56 V dc. Burden 20 VA at 24 V dc and 20 VA at 48 V dc.
Withstands 65 V dc for 1 second.An optional redundant power supply is available.

Sensing Inputs
Four Voltage Inputs:  Rated nominal voltage of 60 V ac to 140 V ac at 60 Hz or 50 Hz. Will withstand 240 V
continuous voltage and 360 V for 10 seconds. Source voltages may be line-to-ground or line-to-line connected.
Phase sequence ABC or ACB is selectable. Voltage transformer burden less than 0.2 VA at 120 V ac.
Seven Current Inputs: Rated nominal current (IR) of 5.0 A or 1.0 A at 60 Hz or 50 Hz. Will withstand 2IR
continuous current and 100IR for 1 second. Current transformer burden is less than 0.5 VA at 5 A, or 0.3 VA
at 1 A.

Control/Status Inputs
The control/status inputs, INPUT1 through INPUT6, can be programmed to block any relay functions, to trigger
the oscillographic recorder, or to operate one or more outputs. The control/status inputs should be dry contacts
and are internally connected (wetted) to a 24 V dc power supply. To provide breaker status LED indication on the
front panel, the INPUT1 control/status input must be connected to the 52b breaker status contact. The minimum
current value to initiate/pickup an Input is >25 mA.

Output Contacts
The eight programmable output contacts (six form ‘a’ and two form ‘c’), the power supply alarm output contact
(form ‘b’), and the self-test alarm output contact (form ‘c’) are all rated per IEEE C37.90 (See Tests and Stan‑
dards section for details).
Any of the functions can be individually programmed to activate any one or more of the eight programmable
output contacts.
Target/Status Indicators and Controls
The RELAY OK LED reveals proper cycling of the microcomputer. The BRKR CLOSED LED will turn on when
the breaker is closed (when the 52b contact input is open). The OSC TRIG LED indicates that oscillographic
data has been recorded in the unit's memory. The TARGET LED will turn on when any of the relay functions
operate. Pressing and releasing the TARGET RESET button resets the target LED if the conditions causing the
operation have been removed. Holding the TARGET RESET button displays the present pickup status of the
relay functions. The PS1 and PS2 LEDs will remain on as long as power is applied to the unit and the power
supply is operating properly.

Communication
Communications ports include rear panel RS‑232 and RS-485 ports, a front panel RS-232 port, and a rear-panel
IRIG‑B port. The communications protocol implements serial, byte-oriented, asynchronous communication,
providing the following functions when used with the Windows™-compatible M‑3820C IPScom® Communications
Software package. MODBUS and BECO 2200 protocols are supported providing:
• Interrogation and modification of setpoints
• Time-stamped trip target information for the 24 most recent events
• Real-time metering of all quantities measured
• Downloading of recorded oscillographic data

–10–
 M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

IRIG-B
The M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay can accept either modulated or demodulated IRIG‑B time clock syn‑
chronization signal. The IRIG‑B time synchronization information is used to correct the hour, minutes, seconds,
and milliseconds information.

HMI Module (optional)

Local access to the relay is provided through an optional M-3931 HMI (Human-Machine Interface) Module, allow‑
ing for easy-to-use, menu-driven access to all functions via six buttons and a 2-line by 24 character alphanumeric
LED. Features of the HMI Module include :
• User-definable access codes allow three levels of security
• Interrogation and modification of setpoints
• Time-stamped trip target information for the 24 most recent events
• Real-time metering of all quantities measured

Target Module (optional)

An optional M-3925 Target Module provides 24 target and 8 output LEDs. Appropriate target LEDs will light
when the corresponding function operates. The targets can be reset with the TARGET RESET pushbutton. The
OUTPUT LEDs indicate the status of the programmable output relays.

Tests and Standards

The relay complies with the following type tests and standards:

Voltage Withstand
Dielectric Withstand
IEC 255-5 3,500 V dc for 1 minute applied to each independent circuit to earth
3,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between each independent circuit
1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied to IRIG-B circuit to earth
1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between IRIG-B to each independent circuit
1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between RS-485 to each independent circuit

Impulse Voltage
IEC 255-5 5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied between each independent circuit
1.2 by 50 µs, 500 ohms impedance, three surges at 1 every 5 seconds

Insulation Resistance
IEC 255-5 > 40 Megaohms

Electrical Environment
Electrostatic Discharge Test
IEC 1000-4-2 Class 4 (8 kV)—point contact discharge

Fast Transient Disturbance Test

IEC 1000-4-4 Class 4 (4 kV, 2.5 kHz)

–11–
M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

Surge Withstand Capability

ANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earth
C37.90.1 2,500 V pk-pk applied between each independent circuit
5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit

Radiated Susceptibility
ANSI/IEEE 25-1000 Mhz @ 35 V/m (with 64F option, 20 V/m)
C37.90.2

Output Contacts Ratings

IEEE C37.90 30 A make for 0.2 seconds at 250 Vdc resistive
UL 508 8 A carry at 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz
CSA C22.2 No. 14 6 A break at 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz
0.1 A break at 125 Vdc
0.1 A break at 120 Vac
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature
IEC 68-2-1 Cold, –20° C for 96 hours
IEC 68-2-2 Dry Heat, +70° C for 96 hours
IEC 68-2-3 Damp Heat, +40° C @ 93% RH, for 96 hours

Mechanical Environment
Vibration
IEC 255-21-1 Vibration response Class 1, 0.5 g
Vibration endurance Class 1, 1.0 g

Compliance
UL-Listed per 508  –  Industrial Control Equipment
CSA-Certified per C22.2 No. 14-95  –  Industrial Control Equipment

Physical
Size:  19.00" wide x 5.21" high x 10.20" deep (48.3 cm x 13.2 cm x 25.9 cm)
Mounting: The unit is a standard 19", semiflush, three-unit high, rack-mount panel design, conforming to
ANSI/EIA RS-310C and DIN 41494 Part 5 specifications. Vertical or horizontal panel-mount options are available.
Approximate Weight:  17 lbs (7.7 kg)
Approximate Shipping Weight:  25 lbs (11.3 kg)

Recommended Storage Parameters

Temperature: 5° C to 40° C
Humidity: Maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31° C, decreasing to 31° C lin‑
early to 50% relative humidity at 40° C.
Environment: Storage area to be free of dust, corrosive gases, flammable materials, dew,
percolating water, rain and solar radiation.
See M-3425 Instruction Book, Appendix E, Layup and Storage for additional information.

–12–
 M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

Patent & Warranty

The M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay is covered by U.S. Patents 5,592,393 and 5,224,011.
The M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay is covered by a five year warranty from date of shipment.

External Connections
M‑3425 external connection points are illustrated in Figure 1, External Connections, on the facing page.

–13–
 6 1 9 0 1 1 8 t h A V E N O .

5 6
1 2 3 4 7 8 10
9

B EC K W IT H E L ECT RIC C O . INC . W A R N IN G ! C O N T A C T W IT H T E R M IN A L S M A Y C A U S E E L E C T R IC S H O C K MODEL: M-3425 FIRMWARE: D-0070

R Danger! Contact avec les terminaux peut causer un choc electrique
C UL US 6 19 0 118 t h AV E NO . F O R C O N T A C T R A T IN G S S E E IN S T R U C T IO N MA NUA L 5 0 Hz 6 0 Hz S E RIA L NO .
LISTED L A RG O , F L 3 3 7 7 3 U.S. PATENT 5,592,393, 5,224,011
NRTL /C
IND.CONT.EQ. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
83F4 LR 89464

IRIG - B COM 2
RS 2 3 2
- + IN IN IN IN IN IN IN
6 5 4 3 2 1 RT N -

P S 2 P S 1
P/ S S E L F - T EST 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
RS 4 8 5 (5 2b) !
COM 3 F 1 F 2

IN PUT S A L A RM S O UT PUT S

V V V V
FIELD GND A B C N I I I I Ia I c PS 2 PS 1 PS 2 PS 1
VA B VB C VC A A B C N
Ib
! COUPLER F1 F2
++ -- ++ --
3 A M P , 2 5 0 V ( 3 A B )
M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

3 A M P ,2 5 0 V ( 3 A B )
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 F 3 F 4

RA T E D V O L T A G E RAT E D C URRE NT
1A ,NO M 5 A ,NO M 18 - 5 6 18 - 5 6
64F 6 0 - 14 0 ,5 0 / 6 0 Hz 85 265 85 265

Figure 1  External Connections

F3 F4

–14–
3.
1.
2.

4.

damage.
 NOTES:

maximum.
Torque Requirements:
be rated at 75° C minimum.
operation contacts.

• Terminals 1–34: 12.0 in‑lbs

the power supply is OK.
PUTS terminals may result in damage to the unit.

has performed all self‑tests successfully.

All relays are shown in the de‑energized state.

• Terminals 35–63: 8.0 in‑lbs, minimum, and 9.0 in‑lbs,

solid or stranded copper wire inserted in an AMP #324915
The power supply relay (P/S) is energized when

s  CAUTION: Over torquing may result in terminal

block connections must be made with No. 22–12 AWG
The self‑test relay is energized when the relay
Output contacts #1 through #4 are high speed
s CAUTION: Application of external voltages to the IN‑

(or equivalent) connector and wire insulation used must

To fulfill requirements for UL and CSA listing, terminal
 M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

Utility System
M-3425 Typical This function is available as a
Connection Diagram standard protective function.
52
This function is available as a
optional protective function. Unit

This function provides control for

the function to which it points.

NOTE: Some functions are

mutually exclusive; see
M-3425 Instruction Book for details.

50 50 CT
BFPh DT

52
Gen

VT

81R 81 27 59 24

87 M-3921
+

64F 64B

27

CT
60FL 21 78 32 51V 40 50/27 51T 46 50

M-3425 M-3425

VT
27
87 50 50N 51N
CT

27 GD BFN
59N R
TN
R
32

High‑impedance Grounding with Third Low‑impedance Grounding with

Harmonic 100% Ground Fault Protection Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection

Figure 2  One‑Line Connection Diagram

–15–
M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

Utility System
M-3425 Typical This function is available as a
Connection Diagram standard protective function.
(Configured for Split-Phase Differential) 52
This function is available as a
optional protective function. Unit

This function provides control for

the function to which it points.

NOTE: Some functions are

mutually exclusive; see
Instruction Book for details.

52
Gen
M-3425
VT

81R 81 27 59 24

50 CT
DT

M-3921
+

64F 64B

27

CT
60FL 21 78 32 51V 40 50/27 51T 46 50

M-3425 M-3425

VT
27 CT
50N 51N
27 59N R
TN
R
32

High‑impedance Grounding with Third Low‑impedance Grounding with

Harmonic 100% Ground Fault Protection Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection

Figure 3  Typical One‑Line Connection Diagram (configured for split-phase differential)

–16–
 M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

Three VT Wye-Wye
Three VT Wye-Wye Connection - Alternate
UTILITY SYSTEM Connection
A B C Other A B C A B C
Relays M-3425
50 51
39 39
38 38
48 49
41
OR 41
40 40
46 47
43 43
42 42

M-3425

M-3425
52
Gen
A
B
C
OR
M‑3921 Two VT Open-Delta
Generator Field Ground Connection
Coupler A B C
Module

M-3425
10
39
52b
11 38
A B C A B C A B C
Other 41
Relays M-3425 M-3425
M-3425
40
58 59 59 58 59 58

43

57 56 57 56 42

M-3425
56 57
OR OR
54 55 55 54 55 54

M-3425
52 53
M-3425

45

44
OR
High Impedance Grounding Low Impedance Grounding

Example of Control / Output Connections

M-3425
DC: 24 V + TRIP
POWER 60 62
48 V SUPPLY
61 63 11 10
OR ‑ 16 15 12 13
DC: 110 V
125 V
220 V
250 V POWER
AC: 110 V 52b 60FL SELF‑TEST
OK 52G
120 V BREAKER OSCILLOGRAPH TRIP FAILURE VT FUSE LOSS
230 V ALARM ALARM STATUS
FAILURE RECORDER ALARM
240 V INITIATE INITIATE

‑
EXTERNAL INPUTS ALARM OUTPUTS CONTROL TRIP OUTPUT
OUTPUTS

Figure 4  M‑3425 Typical Three‑Line Connection Diagram

 NOTE: M‑3425 current terminal polarity marks (•) indicate "entering" current direction when primary current
is "from" the generator. If CT connections differ from those shown, adjust input terminals.

✴
NOTE: Wire to split phase differential CTs for use with 50DT split phase function.

–17–
M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

17.68
[44.91]
17.50
[44.45]
ACTUAL

5.21
5.28
[13.23]
[13.41]
ACTUAL

RECOMMENDED CUTOUT WHEN RELAY IS

NOT USED AS STANDARD RACK MOUNT

17.50
[44.45]

10.20
[25.91]

19.00
[48.26]

18.31 0.35
[46.51] [0.89]

0.40 [1.02] X 0.27

[0.68] Slot (4X)

2.25
[5.72]

1.48
[3.76]

Standard 19" Horizontal Mount Chassis

NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.

Figure 5  Horizontal Mounting Dimensions

 NOTE: Panels for vertical mounting are available. When mounted vertically, the target module will be located
at the top and all front-panel text will be horizontally aligned. Consult Beckwith Electric Co. for details.

–18–
 M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

5.65
[14.40]
6.19 5.59
[14.20] 0.03
[15.7]
Actual [0.076]
2.25 1.97
0.35 [5.72] [5.0] 2.25 1.67
[0.89] [5.72] [4.24]
0.28 [0.71]
Dia. (4X)

TARGETS

19.00
[48.26]

OUTPUTS
OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7

18.30
OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8

[46.51]
17.5
[44.45]
ACTUAL

17.68
[44.91]
EXIT ENTER

TARGET
RESET

PS 2 PS 1

TARGET DIAG

BRKR OSC.
CLOSED TRIG

RELAY TIME
OK SYNC

COM 1

Recommended cutout when relay is not used as

standard rack mount and is panel cut out mounted.
17.50
[44.45]

10.20
[25.91]

19.00
[48.26]

NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.

Figure 6  Vertical Mounting Dimensions

–19–
M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

M‑3921 Field Ground Coupler

 NOTES:
1. The above circuit measures insulation resistance (Rf) between rotor field winding and ground (64F).
2. Relay injects 15 V squarewave (Vout) and measures return signal (Vf) to calculate Rf.
3. The injection frequency can be set (0.1 to 1.0 Hz) based on the rotor capacitance, in order to improve
accuracy.
4. Analyzing signal rise time can determine if shaft brushes are open (64B).

Function Specification
Field/Exciter Supply Voltage Rating (Terminal (3) to (2)):
• 60 to 1200 V dc, continuous
• 1500 V dc, 1 minute

Operating Temperature: –20° to +70°, Centigrade

Patent & Warranty

The M‑3921 Field Ground Coupler is covered by a five year warranty from date of shipment.

Tests and Standards

M‑3921 Field Ground Coupler complies with the following tests and standards:

Voltage Withstand
Isolation
4 kV ac for 1 minute, all terminals to case

Impulse Voltage
IEC 255–5, 5,000 V pk, 1.2 by 50 ms, 0.5 J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at 5 second
part 5 intervals per minute

–20–
 M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

Electrical Interference
Electrostatic Discharge Test
IEC 1000-4-2 Class 4 (8 kV)—point contact discharge

Fast Transient Disturbance Tests

IEC 1000-4-4 Class 4 (4 kV, 2.5 kHz)

Surge Withstand Capability

ANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earth
C37.90.1 2,500 V pk-pk applied between each independent circuit
5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit

Radiated Susceptibility
ANSI/IEEE 25-1000 Mhz @ 20 V/m
C37.90.2

Atmospheric Environment
IEC 68–2–1 Cold, –20° C for 96 hours
IEC 68–2–2 Dry Heat, +70° C for 96 hours
IEC 68–2–3 Damp Heat, +40° C @ 93% RH, for 96 hours

Enclosure Protection
NEMA 1, IEC IPC-65

–21–
 PROTECTION RELAY
M-3425

Figure 7  Typical Field Ground Connection Diagram

PROCESSOR
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
Rear Terminal
Field Ground Block Pin No.
Brushes
Detection

–22–
TB3
Squarewave Vout
Generator 37 TB5 Gen.
Rotor
35 TB4 TB2
Signal COUPLING
Measurement Vf NETWORK Rf.Cf
and Processing (M-3921)
Shaft
M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay

36 TB1 TB1 Ground

Shield Brush
Cable
Ground/Machine Frame
 7.87 [19.99] 2.96 REF [7.52]

3.54 [9.0] M-3921

Field Ground
4.72 [11.99] Coupler

 
 
  

 
 

9.06 [23.01]

–23–
.18 DIA [0.46] 4 X 7.40
[18.79]

.18 DIA [0.46] 4 HOLES

3.54 [9.0]

Figure 8  M‑3921 Field Ground Coupler Mounting Dimensions

MOUNTING PATTERN
WITHOUT TABS

NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.

M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay
© 1998 Beckwith Electric Co. 800‑3425‑SP‑13MC7 08/15
Printed in U.S.A.  (10.16.02)
 WARNING
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, capable of causing death or serious
injury, are present on the external terminals and inside the equip-
ment. Use extreme caution and follow all safety rules when han-
dling, testing or adjusting the equipment. However, these internal
voltage levels are no greater than the voltages applied to the exter-
nal terminals.

DANGER! HIGH VOLTAGE

– This sign warns that the area is connected to a dangerous high voltage, and you
must never touch it.

PERSONNEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The following general rules and other specific warnings throughout the manual must be followed during application, test or repair of this
equipment. Failure to do so will violate standards for safety in the design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. Qualified
personnel should be the only ones who operate and maintain this equipment. Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. assumes no liability for the
customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

– This sign means that you should refer to the corresponding section of the operation
manual for important information before proceeding.

Always Ground the Equipment

To avoid possible shock hazard, the chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. When servic-
ing equipment in a test area, the Protective Earth Terminal must be attached to a separate ground
securely by use of a tool, since it is not grounded by external connectors.

Do NOT operate in an explosive environment

Do not operate this equipment in the presence of flammable or explosive gases or fumes. To do so
would risk a possible fire or explosion.

Keep away from live circuits

Operating personnel must not remove the cover or expose the printed circuit board while power is
applied. In no case may components be replaced with power applied. In some instances, dangerous
voltages may exist even when power is disconnected. To avoid electrical shock, always disconnect
power and discharge circuits before working on the unit.

Exercise care during installation, operation, & maintenance procedures

The equipment described in this manual contains voltages high enough to cause serious injury or
death. Only qualified personnel should install, operate, test, and maintain this equipment. Be sure that
all personnel safety procedures are carefully followed. Exercise due care when operating or servicing
alone.

Do not modify equipment

Do not perform any unauthorized modifications on this instrument. Return of the unit to a Beckwith
Electric repair facility is preferred. If authorized modifications are to be attempted, be sure to follow
replacement procedures carefully to assure that safety features are maintained.
PRODUCT CAUTIONS
Before attempting any test, calibration, or maintenance procedure, personnel must be completely familiar
with the particular circuitry of this unit, and have an adequate understanding of field effect devices. If a
component is found to be defective, always follow replacement procedures carefully to that assure safety
features are maintained. Always replace components with those of equal or better quality as shown in the
Parts List of the Instruction Book.

Avoid static charge

This unit contains MOS circuitry, which can be damaged by improper test or rework procedures. Care
should be taken to avoid static charge on work surfaces and service personnel.

Use caution when measuring resistances

Any attempt to measure resistances between points on the printed circuit board, unless otherwise
noted in the Instruction Book, is likely to cause damage to the unit.
 Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS
M-3425 Generator Protection
Instruction Book

Chapter 1  Introduction
1.1 Instruction Book Contents................................................................. 1–1
1.2 M-3425 Generator Protection Relay................................................. 1–2
1.3 Accessories...................................................................................... 1–4

Chapter 2  Application
2.1 Configuration.................................................................................... 2–1
Functions.......................................................................................... 2–1
Relay System Setup......................................................................... 2–3
2.2 System Diagrams............................................................................. 2–5
2.3  Setpoints and Time Settings............................................................. 2–8
21 Phase Distance........................................................................... 2–9
24 Volts/Hz...................................................................................... 2–12
27 RMS Undervoltage, 3-Phase..................................................... 2–15
27TN Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral Circuit....................... 2–16
32 Directional Power, 3-Phase........................................................ 2–18
40 Loss of Field.............................................................................. 2–20
46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent................................................ 2–23
50/50N Instantaneous Overcurrent, Phase & Neutral Circuits........ 2–25
50BF Generator Breaker Failure/50N HV Breaker Flashover......... 2–26
50DT Definite Time Overcurrent (for split-phase differential).......... 2–28
51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent........................................... 2–29
51T Inverse Time Positive Sequence Overcurrent for
Stator Thermal Protection............................................................... 2–30
51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent with
Voltage Control/Restraint................................................................ 2–32
50/27 Inadvertent Energizing.......................................................... 2–34
59 RMS Overvoltage, 3-Phase....................................................... 2–36
59N RMS Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence.............. 2–37
60FL Fuse Loss.............................................................................. 2–38
64B Brush Lift-Off Detection........................................................... 2–39
64F Field Ground Protection........................................................... 2–41
78 Out of Step................................................................................ 2–43
81 Frequency.................................................................................. 2–45
81R Rate of Change of Frequency................................................. 2–47
87GD Ground (Zero Sequence) Differential.................................... 2–48
87 Phase Differential ..................................................................... 2–49
External Functions.......................................................................... 2–50

i
M-3425 Instruction Book

Chapters (cont'd) Page

Chapter 3  Operation
3.1 Front Panel Controls......................................................................... 3–1
3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/Settings....................................................... 3–3
Setup Unit Data................................................................................ 3–3
Setup System Data........................................................................... 3–6
Configure Relay Data....................................................................... 3–6
Setpoint and Time Settings............................................................... 3–7
Oscillograph Recorder Data.............................................................. 3–7
Communications Data....................................................................... 3–8
3.3 Status/Metering................................................................................. 3–8
Monitor Status/Metering.................................................................... 3–8
3.4 Target History................................................................................... 3–9

Chapter 4  Remote Operation

4.1
Remote Operation............................................................................ 4–1
Direct Connection............................................................................. 4–1
Multiple Systems Setup.................................................................... 4–2
Serial Multidrop Network Setup........................................................ 4–2
Setting up the M‑3425 Generator Protection Relay for
Communications............................................................................... 4–3
Installing the Modems....................................................................... 4–3
Installation and Setup (IPScom®)..................................................... 4–4
4.2
Hardware Requirements................................................................... 4–5
Installation........................................................................................ 4–5
Installing IPScom.............................................................................. 4–5
Installing IPSutil™............................................................................ 4–5
4.3 Operation.......................................................................................... 4–5
Activating Communications............................................................... 4–5
Overview........................................................................................... 4–7
File Menu.......................................................................................... 4–7
Comm Menu..................................................................................... 4–8
Relay Menu....................................................................................... 4–9
Window Menu/Help Menu............................................................... 4–15
4.4 Checkout Status/Metering............................................................... 4–16
4.5 Cautions......................................................................................... 4–19
4.6 Keyboard Shortcuts........................................................................ 4–20
4.7 IPSutil™ Communications Software................................................ 4–21

ii
 Table of Contents

Chapters (cont'd) Page

Chapter 5  Installation
5.1 General Information.......................................................................... 5–1
5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions...................................................... 5–1
5.3 Commissioning Checkout................................................................. 5–8
5.4 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers.............................................. 5­–10

Chapter 6 Testing
6.1 Equipment/Test Setup ...................................................................... 6–2
6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures.............................................................. 6–6
Output Test....................................................................................... 6–6
Input Test.......................................................................................... 6–7
Status LED Test................................................................................ 6–7
Target LED Test................................................................................ 6–8
Expanded I/O Test............................................................................ 6–8
Button Test........................................................................................ 6–8
Display Test...................................................................................... 6–9
COM1/COM2/COM3 Loopback Test................................................. 6–9
COM3 Test (2-Wire).......................................................................... 6–9
Clock Test....................................................................................... 6–10
Flash Relay OK LED Test............................................................... 6–10
Auto Calibration ............................................................................. 6–11
Factory Use Only............................................................................ 6–11
6.3 Auto Calibration.............................................................................. 6–11
Phase and Neutral Calibration........................................................ 6–11
Third Harmonic Calibration............................................................. 6–11
Field Ground Calibration................................................................. 6–12
6.4 Functional Test Procedures............................................................ 6–14
Power On Self Tests....................................................................... 6–15
21 Phase Distance......................................................................... 6–16
24 Volts per Hertz, Definite Time.................................................... 6–18
24 Volts per Hertz, Inverse Time..................................................... 6–19
27 RMS Undervoltage, 3-Phase..................................................... 6–20
27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral.................................. 6–21
32 Directional Power, 3-Phase........................................................ 6–22
40 Loss of Field.............................................................................. 6–24
46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time.......................... 6–25
46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time.......................... 6–26
50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent............................................. 6–27
50BF Breaker Failure...................................................................... 6–28
50/27 Inadvertent Energizing.......................................................... 6–30
50DT Definite Time Overcurrent for Split-Phase Differential........... 6–31
50N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent........................................ 6–32
51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent.......................................... 6–33
51T Inverse Time Positive Sequence Overcurrent for

iii
M-3425 Instruction Book

Chapters (cont'd) Page

Chapter 6 Testing (cont'd)

Stator Thermal Protection............................................................... 6–34
51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent with
Voltage Control/Restraint................................................................ 6–35
59 RMS Overvoltage, 3-Phase....................................................... 6–36
59N RMS Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence.............. 6–37
60FL VT Fuse Loss Detection........................................................ 6–38
64F Field Ground Protection........................................................... 6–39
64B Brush Lift Off Detection........................................................... 6–41
78 Out of Step................................................................................ 6–42
81 Frequency.................................................................................. 6–43
81R Rate of Change of Frequency.......................................6–44
87 Phase Differential...................................................................... 6–46
87GD Ground Differential.............................................................. 6–47
EXT External Functions.................................................................. 6–48

Appendices
Appendix A: Configuration Record Forms.........................................A–1
Appendix B: Communications...........................................................B–1
Appendix C: Self‑Test Error Codes.................................................. C–1
Appendix D: Inverse Time Curves................................................... D–1
Appendix E: Layup and Storage.......................................................E–1

iv
 Table of Contents

Figures Page

Chapter 1
1‑1 M‑3925 Target Module...................................................................... 1–4
1‑2 M‑3931 Human‑Machine Interface (HMI) Module............................ 1–4

Chapter 2
2‑1 One-Line Functional Diagram........................................................... 2–5
2‑2 Alternative One-Line Functional Diagram......................................... 2–6
2‑3 Three-Line Connection Diagram....................................................... 2–7
2‑4 Phase Distance (21) Coverage....................................................... 2–11
2‑5 Phase Distance (21) Function Applied for System Backup............. 2–11
2‑6 Example of Capability and Protection Curves (24)......................... 2–13
2‑7 Third-Harmonic Undervoltage (27TN) Protection Characteristics... 2–16
2‑8 Tripping on Low Forward Power in
Positive Direction (Toward System)................................................. 2–18
2‑9 Tripping on Low Forward Power in
Negative Direction (Toward Generator)........................................... 2–19
2‑10 Loss of Field (40) Protective Approach 1....................................... 2–21
2‑11 Loss of Field (40) Protective Approach 2....................................... 2–21
2‑12 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time Curves................... 2–24
2‑13 Breaker Failure Logic Diagram....................................................... 2–26
2‑14 Inverse Time Curve – 51T.............................................................. 2–31
2‑15 Voltage Restraint (51VR) Characteristic......................................... 2–33
2‑16 Inadvertent Energizing Function Logic Diagram............................. 2–35
2‑17 M‑3921 Field Ground Coupler........................................................ 2–41
2‑18 Out of Step Relay Characteristics................................................... 2–44
2‑19 Example of Frequency (81) Trip Characteristics............................. 2–45
2‑20 Differential Relay (87) Operating Characteristics............................ 2–49
2‑21 External Function Example............................................................. 2–51

Chapter 3
3‑1 M‑3425 Front Panel.......................................................................... 3–4
3‑2 Screen Message Menu Flow............................................................ 3–4
3‑3 Main Menu Flow............................................................................... 3–5

v
M-3425 Instruction Book

Figures (cont'd) Page

Chapter 4
4‑1 Multiple System Addressing Using
Communications Line Splitter........................................................... 4–2
4‑2 IPScom® Program-Item Icon............................................................. 4–5
4‑3 IPScom® Menu Selections................................................................ 4–6
4‑4 New Device Profile Dialog Box......................................................... 4–7
4‑5 Communication Dialog Box............................................................... 4–8
4‑6 Setup System Dialog Box................................................................. 4–9
4‑7 Relay Setpoints Dialog Box............................................................ 4–10
4‑8 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Setpoint Dialog Box..................... 4–10
4‑9 All Setpoints Table Dialog Box........................................................ 4–11
4‑10 Configure Dialog Box...................................................................... 4–12
4‑11 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box............................................................. 4–13
4‑12 Target Dialog Box........................................................................... 4–14
4‑13 About IPScom Dialog Box.............................................................. 4–15
4‑14 Primary Status Dialog Box.............................................................. 4–16
4‑15 Secondary Status Dialog Box......................................................... 4–16
4–16 Phase Distance Dialog Box............................................................ 4–17
4‑17 Loss of Field Dialog Box................................................................. 4–17
4‑18 Out of Step Dialog Box................................................................... 4–18
4‑19 Phasor Dialog Box.......................................................................... 4–18
4‑20 Function Status Dialog Box............................................................ 4–19
4‑21 IPSutil™ Main Menu Flow.............................................................. 4–21
4‑22 Warning Message........................................................................... 4–22
4‑23 Calibration Dialog Box.................................................................... 4–23
4‑24 Communication Dialog Box............................................................. 4–24
4‑25 Relay Comm Port Settings............................................................. 4–24
4‑26 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box............................................................. 4–24
4‑27 Change Communication Access Code Dialog Box......................... 4–25
4‑28 Change Level Access Code Dialog Box......................................... 4–25
4‑29 Setup Dialog Box............................................................................ 4–25

vi
 Table of Contents

Figures (cont'd) Page

Chapter 5
5‑1 M‑3425 Mounting Dimensions  –  Horizontal Chassis....................... 5–2
5‑2 M‑3425 Mounting Dimensions  –  Vertical Chassis............................ 5–3
5‑3 (H2) Mounting Dimensions............................................................... 5–4
5‑4 (H3) Mounting Dimensions for GE L‑2 Cabinet................................ 5–5
5‑5 External Connections........................................................................ 5–6
5‑6 Three‑Line Connection Diagram....................................................... 5–7
5‑7 M-3425 Circuit Board...................................................................... 5–11

Chapter 6
6‑1 Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1....................................................... 6–4
6‑2 Voltage Inputs: Configuration V2....................................................... 6–4
6‑3 Current Inputs: Configuration C1...................................................... 6–4
6‑4 Current Inputs: Configuration C2...................................................... 6–4
6‑5 Current Configuration C3.................................................................. 6–5
6‑6 Status LED Panel............................................................................. 6–8
6‑7 M‑3925 Target Module Panel............................................................ 6–8
6‑8 M‑3931 Human/Machine Interface (HMI) Module............................. 6–9
6‑9 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug............................................................ 6–9
6‑10 RS‑485 2-Wire Testing.................................................................... 6–10
6‑11 Current Input Configuration............................................................ 6–13
6‑12 Voltage Input Configuration............................................................. 6–13
6‑13 Field Ground Coupler Calibration................................................... 6–14
6‑14 Field Ground Coupler..................................................................... 6–41

Appendix A
A‑1 Human‑Machine Interface (HMI) Module..........................................A–3
A‑2 Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form.............................A–4
A‑3 Functional Configuration Record Form.............................................A–5
A–4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form........................................................A–9

Appendix B
B‑1 Null Modem Cable: M‑0423..............................................................B–2
B‑2 RS‑232 Fiber Optic Network.............................................................B–3
B‑3 RS-485 Network...............................................................................B–4
vii
M-3425 Instruction Book

Figures (cont'd) Page

Appendix D
D‑1 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Time Curve Family #1 (Inverse Square)........ D–2
D‑2 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Time Family Curve #2.................................... D–3
D‑3 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Time Curve Family #3................................. D–4
D‑4 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Time Curve Family #4................................. D–5
D‑5 Definite Time Overcurrent Curve..................................................... D–8
D‑6 Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve...................................................... D–9
D‑7 Very Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve............................................ D–10
D‑8 Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve................................... D–11
D‑9 IEC Curve #1  –  Inverse................................................................ D–12
D‑10 IEC Curve #2  –  Very Inverse........................................................ D–13
D‑11 IEC Curve #3  –  Extremely Inverse............................................... D–14
D‑12 IEC Curve #4  –  Long Time Inverse.............................................. D–15

viii
 Table of Contents

Tables Page

Chapter 1
1‑1 M‑3425 Device Functions................................................................. 1–3

Chapter 2
2‑1 Phase Distance (21) Setpoint Ranges.............................................. 2–9
2‑2 Impedance Calculation..................................................................... 2–9
2‑3 Volts‑Per‑Hertz (24) Setpoint Ranges............................................. 2–12
2‑4 RMS Undervoltage, 3-Phase (27) Setpoint Ranges....................... 2–15
2‑5 Third Harmonic Undervoltage (27TN)
Neutral Circuit Setpoint Ranges..................................................... 2–16
2‑6 Directional Power, 3-Phase (32) Setpoint Ranges.......................... 2–18
2‑7 Loss-of-Field (40) Setpoint Ranges................................................ 2–20
2‑8 Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46) Setpoint Ranges.................. 2–23
2‑9 Instantaneous Overcurrent (50/50N) Setpoint Ranges................... 2–25
2‑10 Breaker Failure (50BF) Setpoint Ranges........................................ 2–27
2‑11 Definite Time Overcurrent (50DT) Setpoint Ranges....................... 2–28
2‑12 Inverse Time Overcurrent Neutral (51N) Setpoint Range............... 2–29
2‑13 Inverse Time Positive Sequence
Overcurrent (51T) Setpoint Ranges................................................ 2–30
2‑14 Inverse Time Overcurrent with Voltage Control/Restraint
(51VC/VR) Setpoint Ranges........................................................... 2–32
2‑15 Delta/Wye Transformer Voltage‑Current Pairs................................. 2–33
2‑16 Inadvertent Energizing (50/27) Setpoint Ranges............................ 2–34
2‑17 RMS Overvoltage, 3-Phase (59) Setpoint Ranges.......................... 2–36
2‑18 RMS Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit
or Zero Sequence (59N) Setpoint Ranges...................................... 2–37
2‑19 Fuse Loss (60FL) Setpoint Ranges................................................ 2–38
2‑20 Brush Lift-Off Detection (64B) Setpoint Ranges............................. 2–40
2‑21 Typical Brush Lift-off Settings......................................................... 2–40
2‑22 Field Ground Protection (64F) Setpoint Ranges............................. 2–41
2‑23 Typical Frequency Settings............................................................. 2–42
2‑24 Out of Step (78) Setpoint Ranges.................................................. 2–43
2‑25 Frequency (81) Setpoint Ranges.................................................... 2–45
2‑26 Rate of Change of Frequency (81R) Setpoint Ranges................... 2–47
2‑27 Ground Differential (87GD) Setpoint Ranges.................................. 2–48
2‑28 Differential (87) Setpoint Ranges.................................................... 2–49
2‑29 External Functions Setpoint Range................................................ 2–50

ix
M-3425 Instruction Book

Tables (cont.) Page

Chapter 4
4‑1 Dead Sync Time............................................................................... 4–3
4-2 Protective System Firmware Association.......................................... 4–7
4‑3 Windows Keyboard Shortcuts......................................................... 4–20

Chapter 5
5‑1 Jumpers.......................................................................................... 5–11
5‑2 Dip Switch SW‑1............................................................................. 5–11

Chapter 6
6‑1 Functions to Disable When Testing................................................... 6–3
6‑2 Output Contacts................................................................................ 6–6
6‑3 Input Contacts.................................................................................. 6–7

Appendix A
A‑1 Relay Configuration Table.................................................................A–2

Appendix B
B‑1 Communication Port Signals.............................................................B–2

Appendix C
C‑1 Self-Test Error Codes...................................................................... C–1
C‑2 IPScom® Error Messages................................................................ C–3

Appendix D
D‑1A M‑3425 Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves...... D–6
D‑1B M‑3425 Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves...... D–7

©1998 Beckwith Electric Co. 800‑3425‑IB‑02MC15 08/15

Printed in U.S.A. (9.21.01)

x
 Introduction – 1

1 Introduction

1.1 Instruction Book Contents .................................................................... 1–1

1.2 M-3425 Generator Protection Relay ..................................................... 1–2
1.3 Accessories ......................................................................................... 1–3

Chapter 5: Installation
1.1 Instruction Book Contents
The person or group responsible for the installation
of the relay will find herein all mechanical information
This instruction book has six chapters and four required for physical installation, equipment ratings,
Appendices. and all external connections in this chapter. For
reference, the Three-Line Connection Diagram is
Chapter 1: Introduction repeated from Chapter 2, Application. Further, a
Chapter One summarizes relay capabilities, commissioning checkout procedure is outlined using
introduces the instruction book contents, and the HMI option to check the external CT and VT
describes accessories. connections. Additional tests which may be desirable
at the time of installation are described in Chapter
Chapter 2: Application 6, Testing.
Chapter Two is designed for the person or group Chapter 6: Testing
responsible for the application of the M-3425 Generator
Protection Relay. It includes functional and connection This chapter provides step-by-step test procedures
diagrams for a typical application of the relay; and for each function, as well as diagnostic mode and
describes the configuration process for the unit autocalibration procedures for HMI-equipped units.
(choosing active functions), output contact Appendix A: Configuration Record Forms
assignment and input blocking designation. It also
illustrates the definition of system quantities and This Appendix supplies a set of forms to record and
equipment characteristics required by the protective document the settings required for the proper
operation of the relay.
relay, and describes the individual function settings.
Appendix B: Communications
Chapter 3: Operation
Chapter Three is designed for the person(s) This Appendix describes port signals, protocols,
and various topologies, and equipment required for
responsible for the operation, direct setting, and
remote communication.
configuration of the relay. Chapter Three provides
information on the operation and interpretation of the Appendix C: Self-Test Error Codes
unit's front panel controls and indicators, including
This Appendix lists all the error codes and their
operation of the optional M-3931 HMI and M-3925
definitions.
Target modules. It further describes the procedures
for entering all required data to the relay. Included in Appendix D: Inverse Time Curves
this chapter is a description of the process necessary This Appendix contains a graph of the four families
for review of setpoints and timing, monitoring function of Inverse Time Curves for V/Hz applications, the
status and metering quantities, viewing the target Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves, and the IEC
history, and setup of the oscillograph recorder. curves.
Chapter 4: Remote Operation Appendix E: Layup and Storage
This chapter is designed for the person or group This Appendix includes the recommended storage
responsible for the remote operation and setting of the parameters, periodic surveillance activities and layup
relay using the M-3820A IPScom® Communications configuration for the M-3425 Generator Protection
Software package or other means. Relay.
1–1
M-3425 Instruction Book

1.2 M-3425 Generator Protection FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

Relay Standard Prote ctive Functions

The M-3425 Generator Protection Relay is a 21 Phase Distance

microprocessor-based unit that uses digital signal 24 Volts/Hz (Inverse & Definite Time)
processing technology to provide up to twenty-six
protective relaying functions for generator protection. 27 RMS Undervoltage
The relay can protect a generator from internal
winding faults, system faults, and other abnormal 27TN Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral
conditions. 32 Directional Power
The available internal functions of the relay are 40 Loss- of- Field
listed in Table 1-1. The nomenclature follows the
standards of ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.2-1991, Standard 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent
Electric Power Systems Device Function Numbers.
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent
Six input contacts can be programmed to block any 50BF Breaker Failure
relay function and/or to trigger the oscillograph
recorder. Any of the functions or the input contacts 50DT Definite Time Overcurrent
can be individually programmed to activate any one
or more of the eight programmable output contacts. 50N Instantaneous Overcurrent, Neutral

With the optional M-3931 HMI (Human-Machine 50/27 Inadvertant Energizing

Interface) Module, all functions can be set or 51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent
examined via a local, menu-driven, 2 line by 24
character alphanumeric display. The module allows Inverse Time Overcurrent, with Voltage
51V
local metering of various quantities, including phase, Control/Restraint
neutral, and sequence voltages and currents, real
59 RMS Overvoltage
and reactive power, power factor, and positive
sequence impedance measurements. 59N RMS Overvoltage, Neutral
The relay stores time-tagged target information for 60F L VT Fuse- Loss Detection
the twenty-four most recent events. For units
equipped with the optional M-3925 Target Module, 78 Out- of- Step
LEDs are used to provide a detailed visual indication 81 Frequency
of function operation for the most recent event.
81R Rate of Change of Frequency
The unit retains up to 170 cycles of oscillograph
waveform data. This data can be downloaded and 87 Phase Differential
analyzed using the M-3801D IPSplot ® PLUS
Oscillograph Analysis Software package. 87GD Ground (zero sequence) Differential

The unit is powered from a wide input range switch Ext External Functions
mode power supply. An optional redundant power Optional Prote ctive Functions
supply is available.
Inverse Time Positive Sequence
The relay includes self-test, auto calibration, and 51T Overcurrent for Stator Thermal
diagnostic capabilities, in addition to IRIG-B time- Protection
sync capability for accurate time-tagging of events.
Field Ground Protection/
64F/64B
Brush Lift- Off Detection

Table 1-1 M-3425 Device Functions

1–2
 Introduction – 1

Three communication ports are provided. COM1 M-3933/M-0423 Serial Communication Cables
and COM2 are standard 9-pin RS-232 DTE- The M-3933 cable is a 10-foot RS-232 cable for use
configured communications ports. The front-panel between the relay’s rear panel (COM2) port and a
port, COM1, is used to locally set and interrogate modem. This cable has a DB25 (25-pin) connector
the relay via a portable computer. The second (modem) and a DB9 (9-pin) at the relay end.
RS-232 port, COM2, is provided at the rear of the
unit. An RS-485 communications port, COM3, is The M-0423 cable is a 10-foot null-modem RS-232
also available at the rear terminal block of the relay. cable for direct connection between a PC and the
Either rear-panel port, COM2 or COM3, can be used relay’s front panel COM1 port, or the rear COM2
to remotely set and interrogate the relay via hard- port. This cable has a DB9 (9-pin) connector at
wired serial connection or modem. each end.

M-3820A IPScom Communications Software M-3931 HMI (Human-Machine Interface) Module

IPScom® is shipped standard with every relay. This The optional HMI module provides the means to
software runs on a PC-compatible computer operating interrogate the relay and to input settings, access
under Microsoft Windows® 95/98 or later. When data, etc. directly from the front of the relay. Its
properly connected via either direct serial connection operation is described in detail in Section 3.1, Front
or modem, IPScom can provide the following Panel Controls.
functions:

• Setpoint interrogation and modification

• Line status real-time monitoring
• Recorded oscillograph data downloading BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.
M-3425

a
1.3 Accessories

M-3925 Target Module a

The optional target module, shown below, includes a
24 individually labelled TARGET LEDs to indicate
operation of the functions on the front panel. Eight
a
individually labelled OUTPUT LEDs will be lit as long
as the corresponding output contact is picked up. EXIT ENTER

Figure 1-2 M-3931 Human-Machine

TARGETS Interface (HMI) Module
24 VOLTS/HZ PHASE OVERCURRENT 50
27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE PHASE OVERCURRENT 51V
59 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT 50N M-3801D IPSplot® PLUS Oscillograph Analysis
27TN/64S 100% STATOR GND NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT 51N Software Package
59N NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE SPLIT PHASE DIFF 50DT
32 DIRECTIONAL POWER POS SEQ OVERCURRENT 51T The IPSplot PLUS Oscillograph Analysis Software
21 PHASE DISTANCE NEG SEQ OVERCURRENT 46 runs in conjunction with the IPScom® software
40 LOSS OF FIELD FIELD GND/BRUSH LIFT 64F/B
package on any IBM PC-compatible computer,
78 OUT OF STEP FREQUENCY/ROCOF 81/81R
50BF BREAKER FAILURE PHASE DIFF CURRENT 87 enabling the plotting, printing, and analysis of
50/27 INADVERTENT ENRGNG GND DIFF CURRENT 87GD waveform data downloaded from the M-3425
60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS EXTERNAL EXT Generator Protection Relay.
OUTPUTS
OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7
OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8

Figure 1-1 M-3925 Target Module

1–3
M-3425 Instruction Book

This Page Left Intentionally Blank

1–4
 Application – 2

2 Application

2.1 Configuration ............................................................................................ 2–1

2.2 System Diagrams ..................................................................................... 2–5
2.3 Setpoints and Time Settings .................................................................... 2–8

Chapter Two is designed for the person or group

responsible for the application of the M-3425 2.1 Configuration
Generator Protection Relay. It includes functional
and connection diagrams for a typical application of Functions
the relay; and describes the configuration process Configuration of the relay consists of enabling the
for the unit (choosing active functions), output functions for use in a particular application,
contact assignment and input blocking designation. designating the output contacts each function will
It also illustrates the definition of system quantities operate, and which status inputs will block the
and equipment characteristics required by the function. The choices include eight programmable
protective relay, and describes the individual function output contacts (OUT1–OUT8) and six status inputs
settings. (IN1–IN6), plus a block choice for fuse loss logic
operation (see Section 2.3, Setpoint and Time
Screens shown in the following examples are as
they would appear on units equipped with the M-3931 Settings, 60FL Fuse Loss subsection for details).
HMI Module. The same setting may be entered The blocking status inputs and output contact
remotely via M-3820A IPScom® Communications assignments must be chosen before entering the
Software (see Chapter 4, Remote Operation). settings for the individual functions. Both may be
recorded on the Relay Configuration Table in
Appendix A, Configuration Record Forms.

2–1
 M-3425 Instruction Book

Status input IN1 is preassigned to be the 52b + 51T Inverse Time Positive Sequence
breaker status contact. If a multiple breaker scheme Overcurrent for Stator Thermal Protection
is used, the input IN1 must be the series • 51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent with
combination of the “52b” breaker contacts. Additional Voltage Control/ Restraint
user-chosen status inputs may initiate actions such
as breaker failure, initiate external fuse loss • 59 RMS Overvoltage, 3-Phase #1, #2
detection, or trigger the oscillograph recorder. • 59N RMS Overvoltage, Neutral #1, #2
(“•” denotes standard protective functions and “+” • 60FL Fuse Loss Detection
denotes optional protective functions.) + 64B Brush Lift-Off Detection
+ 64F Field Ground Protection, #1, #2
• 21 Phase Distance, #1, #2 • 78 Out-of-Step
• 24 Volts/Hz: Def Time #1, #2, Inv Time • 81 Frequency #1, #2, #3, #4
• 27 RMS Undervoltage, 3-Phase #1, #2 • 81R Rate of Change of Frequency, #1,#2
• 27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, • 87 Phase Differential
Neutral, #1, #2
• 87GD Ground Differential
• 32 Directional Power, 3-Phase #1, #2
• External #1, #2
• 40 Loss of Field #1, #2
• 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent: The relay allows the user to designate up to two
Def Time, Inv Time external functions which perform similarly to internal
• 50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent relay functions. These external functions may be
• 50BF Breaker Failure enabled or disabled, and output contacts and
blocking inputs are chosen the same as for the
• 50DT Definite Time Overcurrent, #1, #2 internal functions. The external functions are
• 50N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent described in further detail in Section 2.3, Setpoint
• 50/27 Inadvertent Energization and Time Settings, External Functions subsection.
• 51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent

60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS This designation is required for each relay function. After enabling
the function, the user is presented with the two following screens:
disable ENABLE

60FL BLOCK INPUT This assigns the blocking designations (up to six) for the enabled
function. “OR” logic is used if more than one input is selected.
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 I1

This screen assigns the output contacts (up to eight) for the particular
60FL RELAY OUTPUT relay function. If no output contacts are assigned, the function will
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 O1 not generate any output or targets even though the function is
enabled.

Q NOTE: Uppercase text indicates selection.

2–2
 Application – 2

Relay System Setup required. Several functions require proper setting of

The system setup consists of defining all pertinent these values for correct operation. The Nominal
information regarding the system quantities. Setup Voltage and Nominal Current settings are needed
screens shown here may be accessed through the for proper normalization of per unit quantities. CT
SYSTEM SETUP menu. Regardless of the functions and VT ratios are used only in monitoring and
enabled or disabled, all information shown is displaying system primary quantities.

The secondary VT voltage when primary voltage is equal to the

NOMINAL VOLTAGE
rated generator voltage. (V gen rated $ VT ratio)
________ Volts

The secondary CT current of the phase CT’s with rated generator

NOMINAL CURRENT
current. (I gen rated $ CT ratio)
________ Amps

Indicates VT connection. (See Figure 2-3, Three-Line Connection

VT CONFIGURATION
Diagram.) When line-ground voltages are used, functions 24, 27,
line-line line-groundJ
and 59 may operate for line-ground faults. If this is not desired, the
line-gnd-to-line-line selection should be used to prevent operation
Iline-gnd_to_line-line of these functions for line-ground faults.
When line-gnd-to-line-line is selected, the relay internally calculates
line-line voltages from line-ground voltages for all voltage-sensitive
functions. This line-gnd-to-line-line selection should be used only
for a VT nominal secondary voltage of 69V (not for 120 V). For this
selection, the nominal voltage setting entered should be line-line
nominal voltage, which is S3 times line-ground nominal voltage.

By enabling the Delta-Y Transform, the relay will internally consider the
DELTA-Y TRANSFORM
30° phase shift through the delta-wye unit transformer for 51V and 21
disable enable
functions.

PHASE ROTATION This screen allows the user to select the phase rotation of the M-3425
a-c-b a-b-c to match the generator.

59/27 MAGNITUDE SELECT This screen allows selection of RMS or DFT for the 59 and 27
rms dft functions. The magnitude can be selected as the RMS of the total
waveform (including harmonics) or the RMS of the 60/50 Hz
fundamental component of the waveform using the Discrete Fourier
Transform (DFT). When the RMS option is selected, the magnitude
calculation is accurate over a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz)
and the accuracy of the time delay is +20 cycles. When the DFT
option is selected, the magnitude calculation is accurate near 50 or
60 Hz and the timer accuracy is &1 cycle. When a wider frequency
response is needed, select RMS. For generator protection applications,
it is recommended to use the RMS selection. RMS is the default
when shipped from the factory.

2–3
 M-3425 Instruction Book

50DT SPLIT-PHASE OPERATE If the 50DT function is to be used for split-phase differential pro-
disable enable tection, this selection should be enabled. If the 50DT function is to
be used as a definite time overcurrent function, this selection should
be disabled.

PULSE RELAY If pulse relay operation is selected, output will dropout after the
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 seal-in delay expires, even if the condition which caused the relay
to pick up is still out of band.

RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT1 Minimum time the output contact will remain picked up to ensure
________ Cycles proper seal-in, regardless of the subsequent state of the initiating
function. Individual Seal-In settings are available for all outputs.

ACTIVE INPUT OPEN/close This designates the “active” state for the individual status input.
I6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 Programming uppercase (see I6) causes the “active” or “operated”
condition to be initiated by the external contact opening. Other-
wise, external contact closure will activate the input.

V.T. PHASE RATIO Ratio of the phase VTs.

________ : 1

V.T. NEUTRAL RATIO Ratio of the neutral VT.

________ :1

C.T. PHASE RATIO Ratio of phase CTs.

________ : 1

C.T. NEUTRAL RATIO Ratio of transformer neutral CT.

________ : 1

2–4
 Application – 2

2.2 System Diagrams

Utility System
M-3425 Typical This function is available as a
Connection Diagram standard protective function.
52
This function is available as a
optional protective function. Unit

This function provides control for

the function to which it points.

NOTE: Some functions are

mutually exclusive; see
M-3425 Instruction Book for details.

CT
50 50
BFPh DT

52
Gen

VT

81R 81 27 59 24

87 M-3921
+

64F 64B

27

CT
60FL 21 78 32 51V 40 50/27 51T 46 50

M-3425 M-3425

VT
27 CT
87 50 50N 51N
27 GD BFN
59N R
TN
R
32

High-impedance Grounding with Third Low-impedance Grounding with

Harmonic 100% Ground Fault Protection Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection

Figure 2-1 One-Line Functional Diagram

2–5
M-3425 Instruction Book

Utility System
M-3425 Typical This function is available as a
Connection Diagram standard protective function.
(Configured for Split-Phase Differential) 52
This function is available as a
optional protective function. Unit

This function provides control for

the function to which it points.

NOTE: Some functions are

mutually exclusive; see
Instruction Book for details.

52
Gen
M-3425
VT

81R 81 27 59 24

CT
50
DT

M-3921
+

64F 64B

27

CT
60FL 21 78 32 51V 40 50/27 51T 46 50

M-3425 M-3425

VT
27 CT
50N 51N
27 59N R
TN
R
32

High-impedance Grounding with Third Low-impedance Grounding with

Harmonic 100% Ground Fault Protection Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection

Figure 2-2 Alternative One-Line Functional Diagram

2–6
 Application – 2

Three VT Wye-Wye
Three VT Wye-Wye Connection -
UTILITY SYSTEM Connection
A B C A B C Ungrounded
A B C Other
Relays M-3425
50 51
39 39
38 38
48 49
41
OR 41
40 40
46 47
43 43

M-3425

M-3425
42 42
52
Gen
A
B
C
OR
M-3921 Two VT Open-Delta
Generator Field Ground Connection
Coupler A B C
Module

M-3425
10
39
52b
11 38
A B C A B C A B C
Other 41
Relays M-3425 M-3425
M-3425
40
58 59 59 58 59 58

43
42

M-3425
56 57
OR 57 56
OR 57 56

54 55 55 54 55 54

M-3425
52 53
M-3425

45

44
OR
High Impedance Grounding Low Impedance Grounding

Example of Control / Output Connections

M-3425
DC: 24 V + TRIP
POWER 60 62
48 V SUPPLY
61 63 11 10
OR - 16 15 12 13
DC: 110 V
125 V
220 V
250 V POWER
AC: 110 V 52b 60FL SELF-TEST
OK 52G
120 V BREAKER OSCILLOGRAPH TRIP FAILURE VT FUSE LOSS
230 V ALARM ALARM STATUS
FAILURE RECORDER ALARM
240 V INITIATE INITIATE

-
EXTERNAL INPUTS ALARM OUTPUTS CONTROL TRIP OUTPUT
OUTPUTS

Figure 2-3 Three-Line Connection Diagram

2–7
 M-3425 Instruction Book

2.3 Setpoints and Time Settings

The individual protective functions, along with their

magnitude and timing settings are described in the
following pages. Settings for disabled functions do
not apply. Some menu and setting screens do not
appear for functions that are disabled or not purchased.
Screens shown in the following examples are as
they would appear on units equipped with the M-3931
HMI. The same setting may be entered remotely via
M-3820A IPScom® Communications Software.

21 Phase Distance ............................................................................................................ 2–9

24 Volts/Hz ...................................................................................................................... 2–12
27 RMS Undervoltage, 3 Phase ...................................................................................... 2–15
27TN Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral .................................................................... 2–16
32 Directional Power, 3 Phase ........................................................................................ 2–18
40 Loss of Field .............................................................................................................. 2–20
46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent ................................................................................ 2–23
50/50N Instantaneous Overcurrent, Phase and Neutral Circuits ...................................... 2–25
50BF Breaker Failure/HV Breaker Flashover ................................................................... 2–26
50DT Definite Time Overcurrent for split-phase differential .............................................. 2–28
51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent ............................................................................. 2–29
51T Inverse Time Positive Sequence Overcurrent for Stator Thermal Protection ............ 2–30
51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent with Voltage Control/Restraint .............................. 2–32
50/27 Inadvertent Energization ....................................................................................... 2–34
59 RMS Overvoltage, 3 Phase ....................................................................................... 2–36
59N RMS Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence ............................................... 2–37
60FL Fuse Loss ............................................................................................................... 2–38
64B Brush Lift-Off Detection ............................................................................................ 2–39
64F Field Ground Protection ............................................................................................ 2–41
78 Out of Step ................................................................................................................. 2–43
81 Frequency .................................................................................................................. 2–45
81R Rate of Change of Frequency ................................................................................... 2–47
87GD Ground Differential ................................................................................................ 2–48
87 Phase Differential ....................................................................................................... 2–49
EXT External Functions .................................................................................................. 2–50

2–8
 Application – 2

21 Phase Distance 2.1, Configuration, Relay System Setup), the relay

The phase distance function (21) is designed for can internally consider the 30° phase shift through
system phase fault backup protection and is the delta/wye transformer, saving auxiliary VTs.
implemented as a two-zone mho characteristic. Impedance calculations for various VT connections
Three separate distance elements are used to detect are shown in Table 2-2. All impedance settings are
AB, BC, and CA fault types. The ranges and secondary relay quantities and can be derived from
increments are shown in Table 2-1. The diameter, the following formula:
offset, system impedance angle (relay characteristic
Z SEC = ZPRI x (RC ÷ RV)
angle), and definite time delay need to be selected
for each zone for coordination with the system where ZSEC = secondary reflected impedance, ZPRI =
relaying in the specific application. primary impedance, RC = current transformer ratio,
and RV = voltage transformer ratio.
When the generator is connected to the system
through a delta/wye transformer, proper voltages The minimum current sensitivity depends on the
and currents (equivalent to the high side of the programmed reach (diameter and offset). If the
transformer) must be used in order for the relay to current is below the minimum sensitivity current,
see correct impedances for system faults. By the impedance calculated will saturate, and not be
enabling the Delta-Y Transform feature (see Section accurate. This will not cause any relay misoperation.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Phas e Dis tance (21)

0.1 to 100.0 Ω
Circle Diameter #1, #2 0.1 Ω
(0.5 to 500.0 Ω)

- 100.0 to 100.0 Ω
Offset #1, #2 0.1 Ω
(- 500.0 to 500.0 Ω )

Impedance Angle #1, #2 0o to 90o 1o

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Table 2-1 Phase Distance (21) Setpoint Ranges

Direct-Connected Delta/Wye Transformer Connected

VT Connection VT Connection

L-L or L-G to L-L L-G L-L or L-G to L-L L-G

VAB VA – VB VBC – VAB VB–V0

AB Fault I a – Ib
I a – Ib (3)I b Ib

VBC VB – VC VCA–VBC VC–V0

BC Fault
Ib–Ic Ib–Ic (3)Ic Ic

VCA VC – VA VAB–VCA VA–V0

CA Fault I c –Ia (3)Ia Ia
Ic –Ia

Table 2-2 Impedance Calculation

2–9
M-3425 Instruction Book

Typically the first zone of protection is set to an impedance value

21 #1 DIAMETER enough in excess of the first external protective section (typically
________ Ohms the unit transformer) to assure operation for faults within that pro-
tective zone. (See Figure 2-4, Phase Distance (21) Coverage.)

21 #1 OFFSET A negative or positive offset can be specified to offset the mho

circle from the origin. This offset is usually set at zero. (See Figure
________ Ohms
2-5, Phase Distance (21) Function Applied For System Backup.)

21 #1 IMPEDANCE ANGLE The impedance angle should be set as closely as possible to the
________ Degrees actual impedance angle of the zone being protected.

21 #1 DELAY The time delays are set to coordinate with the primary protection of
those overreached zones and, when applicable, with the breaker
________ Cycles
failure schemes associated with those protective zones.

21 #2 DIAMETER The 21 #2 zone settings can be set for the second external section
of protection on the system (typically transmission Zone 1 distance
________ Ohms
relays) plus adequate overreach.

21 #2 OFFSET
________ Ohms

21 #2 IMPEDANCE ANGLE
________ Degrees

21 #2 DELAY
________ Cycles

2–10
 Application – 2

+X
Protected Range Zone 2

Protected Range Zone 1

–R +R

–X
3
52

M-3425
21
Figure 2-4 Phase Distance (21) Coverage

+jX

Transmission Line

Circle
Diameters
Unit Transformer
System
Impedance
Angle
–R +R

–jX
Figure 2-5 Phase Distance (21) Function Applied for System Backup

2–11
 M-3425 Instruction Book

24 Volts/Hz Setting this relay function involves determining the

The Volts-Per-Hertz function (24) provides desired protection levels and operating times. The
overexcitation protection for the generator and unit- first step is to plot the combined generator and
connected transformers. This function incorporates associated unit transformer overexcitation capability
two definite time elements which can be used to limits. This data is typically available from the
realize traditional two-step overexcitation protection. manufacturer and should be plotted on the same
In addition, the relay includes an inverse time element voltage base. Depending on the resulting
that provides superior protection by closely characteristic, one of the four families of inverse
approximating the combined generator/unit time curves (as shown in Appendix D, Inverse
transformer overexcitation curve. Industry standard Time Curves) can be matched to provide the
inverse curves may be selected along with a linear protection. The two definite time elements can be
reset rate which may be programmed to match used to further shape the protection curve or provide
specific machine cooling characteristics. The percent an alarm.
pickup is based on the Nominal Voltage setting and
the based frequency. The V/Hz function provides
reliable measurements of V/Hz up to 200% for a
frequency range of 2–80 Hz. The ranges and
increments are presented in Table 2-3.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Volts -Pe r-He rtz (24)

De finite Time

Pickup #1, #2 100 to 200% 1%

Time Delay #1, #2 30 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Inve rs e Time

Pickup 100 to 200% 1%

Characteristic Curves Inverse Time #1–#4 -

Time Dial Setting:

Curve 1 1- 100 1

Curves 2–4 0- 9 0 .1

1–999 Sec
Reset Rate 1 Sec
(from threshold of trip)

Table 2-3 Volts-per-Hertz (24) Setpoint Ranges

2–12
 Application – 2

Figure 2-6 illustrates a composite graph of generator After any V/Hz excursion, cooling time must also
and transformer limits, a chosen inverse time curve be taken into account. If the unit should again be
and pickup, and a definite time pickup and delay. subjected to high V/Hz before it has cooled to
normal operating levels, damage could be caused
Be aware that all V/Hz inverse timing curves saturate before the V/Hz trip point is reached. For this
at 150%, above which timing will be constant. If reason, a linear reset characteristic, adjustable to
definite time element #1 or #2 is to be used for fixed take into account the cooling rate of the unit, is
time trip operation in conjunction with the inverse provided. If a subsequent V/Hz excursion occurs
time element, definite time pickup must be before the reset characteristic has timed out, the
programmed above the inverse time pickup. Also, time delay will pick up from the equivalent point (as
the time delay at this pickup should be less than the a %) on the curve. The Reset Rate setting entered
inverse operating time at that same level to be should be time needed for the unit to cool to normal
effective. operating temperature if the V/Hz excursion time
was just under the trip point.

1000

Generator Limit Curve

100
Transformer Limit Curve
on Generator Base

Inverse Square Curve

10 K=5
Time in Minutes

Combined Protection
Curve

1
Definite Time Delay

A2
0.1 Definite Time Pickup

A1
Inverse Time Pickup

0.01

100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150

Percentage Volts/Hz

Figure 2-6 Example of Capability and Protection Curves (24)

2–13
M-3425 Instruction Book

24DT #1 PICKUP Definite time setpoint #1 establishes the V/Hz level above which the
________ % protection operating time will be fixed at the definite time delay #1.

24DT #1 DELAY Delay time #1 establishes the operation time of the protection for
________ Cycles all V/Hz values above the level set by definite time setpoint #1.

24DT #2 PICKUP Definite time setpoint #2 could be programmed to alarm, alerting the
________ % operator to take proper control action to possibly avoid tripping.

24DT #2 DELAY Time to operation at any V/Hz value exceeding Definite time setting
________ Cycles #2.

24IT PICKUP The pickup value is the V/Hz value at which the chosen inverse
________ % curve begins protective operation. Typical value is 105%.

24IT CURVE Allows the user to designate the appropriate curve family for this
crv#1 crv#2 crv#3 crv#4 protection application. These curves are shown in Appendix D,
Inverse Time Curves.

24IT TIME DIAL The appropriate curve in the family is designated by the associated
________ “K” value of the curve.

24IT RESET RATE The value entered here should be the time needed for the unit to
________ Seconds cool to normal operating temperature if the V/Hz excursion time
was just under the trip time.

2–14
 Application – 2

27 RMS Undervoltage, 3 Phase Magnitude measurement depends on the 59/27

The Undervoltage function (27) may be used to detect Magnitude Select setting. (See Section 2.1,
any condition causing long- or short-term undervoltage. Configuration, Relay System Setup.) When the RMS
This is a true three-phase function in that each phase option is selected, the magnitude calculation is accurate
has an independent timing element. The ranges and over a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz) and the
increments are presented in Table 2-4. accuracy of the time delay is +20 cycles. If DFT
option is selected, the magnitude calculation is accurate
near 50 or 60 Hz, and the timer accuracy is &1 cycle.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

RM S Unde rvoltage (27)

Pickup #1, #2 5 to 180 V 1V

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Table 2-4 RMS Undervoltage, 3-Phase (27) Setpoint Range

27 #1 PICKUP
________ Volts

27 #1 DELAY
________ Cycles

27 #2 PICKUP
________ Volts

27 #2 DELAY
________ Cycles

2–15
 M-3425 Instruction Book

27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, The 27TN setting depends on the actual third-
Neutral Circuit harmonic neutral voltage level seen during normal
For ground faults near the stator neutral, the third- operation of the generator. The setting should be
harmonic (180/150 Hz) neutral undervoltage function about 50% of the minimum third-harmonic voltage
(27TN) provides stator ground-fault protection for observed during various loading conditions. This
high-impedance-grounded generator applications can be most conveniently measured during
(See Figure 2-7). When used in conjunction with commissioning of the relay. Since the relay
the fundamental neutral overvoltage (60/50Hz) measures the 3rd harmonic voltage levels and
function (59N), 100% stator ground-fault protection will display those values directly, no additional
can be provided. This is illustrated in Figure 2-7. equipment is required. The undervoltage inhibit
setting should be about 80% to 90% of the nominal
The 27TN function supervision can be configured voltage. The ranges and increments are presented
by the user to be either independent positive- in Table 2-5.
sequence undervoltage element or forward power
flow element, or both. Supervision can prevent
tripping when the generator field is not energized
or the unit is not yet synchronized.

Fundamental (60/50 Hz) neutral

voltage during ground fault
Neutral Voltage

Third-Harmonic (180/150 Hz) neutral

voltage during ground fault

Pre-fault third-harmonic voltage level

27TN Setpoint
Pre-fault fundamental neutral voltage level
59N Setpoint (typically 5V)
Neutral End of Terminal End
Generator of Generator
0% 50% 100%
Fault Position
(% of stator winding measured
27TN from neutral end of generator)
Protection
provided by: 59N

5% - 10%

0-30%

Figure 2-7 Third Harmonic Undervoltage (27TN) Protection Characteristics

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Third-Harmonic Unde rvoltage , Ne utral Circuit (27TN)

Pickup #1, #2 0.3 to 20.0 V 0.1 V

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Undervoltage Inhibit #1, #2

5 to 180 V 1V
(positive sequence)

Underpower Inhibit #1, #2 0.002 to 3.000 pu 0 . 0 0 1 pu

Table 2-5 Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral Circuit (27TN) Setpoint Ranges

2–16
 Application – 2

27TN #1 PICKUP Relay volts are equal to the primary neutral voltage divided by the
________ Volts grounding transformer ratio. Generally set for approximately 50%
of the minimum third harmonic voltage observed during various
loading conditions.
27TN #1 DELAY
________ Cycles

27TN #1 VOLT INHIBIT An inhibit voltage setting is required if 27TN #1 is enabled. Gener-
________ Volts ally set equal to 80–90% of nominal voltage.

27TN #1 POWER INHIBIT In some generation applications, it is desirable to supervise the

disable enable operation of the 27TN with power flow from the generator. In those
applications, enable the 27TN Under Power Inhibit and set at the
desired per unit power level.

27TN #1 POWER INHIBIT The per unit value is based on the Nominal Current and Nominal
________ PU Voltage values input to the relay and may be set from 0.002 to
3.000 PU.

27TN #2 PICKUP
________ Volts

27TN #2 DELAY
________ Cycles

27TN #2 VOLT INHIBIT

________ Volts

27TN #2 POWER INHIBIT

disable ENABLE

27TN #2 POWER INHIBIT

________ PU

2–17
 M-3425 Instruction Book

32 Directional Power, 3-Phase alarm or tripping. Again, when the Low Forward
The directional power function can provide protection Power setting is disabled, the relay will trip in the
against both generator motoring and overload. It reverse direction (negative programmed Pickup
provides two power setpoints, each with a magnitude setting), when the measured real power is less than
setting and a time delay. The Forward Power direction (more negative) or equal to the Pickup setting. This
(power flow to system) is automatically chosen configuration can be used for sequential tripping
when the pickup setting is positive and the Reverse when power is below the setting. The ranges and
Power direction (power flow to generator) is increments are presented in Table 2-6.
automatically chosen when the pickup setting is
When tripping is desired for reverse power flow or
negative. The range, as shown is from –3.000 PU to
very small forward power values, the Low Forward
3.000 PU where 1.0 PU is equal to the generator
Power setting can be enabled. In this case, tripping
MVA rating. Normalized PU power flow
occurs when the power is in the reverse direction or
measurements are based on Nominal Voltage and
below the pickup value in the forward direction (see
Nominal Current setting, as shown in Section 2.1,
Figure 2-8 for settings in the positive direction, and
Configuration, Relay System Setup.
Figure 2-9 for settings in the negative direction).
When the Low Forward Power setting is disabled, When the Low Forward Power feature is used, it
the relay will trip in the forward direction (positive may be necessary to block the 32 function during
programmed Pickup setting). This configuration can startup in order to avoid nuisance trips.
be used for overload protection, providing either

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGES INCREM ENT

Dire ctional Powe r (32)

Pickup #1, #2 - 3.000 to +3.000 PU 0 . 0 01 P U

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Table 2-6 Directional Power, 3-Phase (32) Setpoint Ranges

Reverse Forward
Power Flow Power Flow
PU
-1.0 PU 1.0 PU

TRIP

Pickup

Figure 2-8 Tripping on Low Forward Power in Positive Direction (Toward System)

2–18
 Application – 2

Reverse Forward
Power Flow Power Flow
PU
-1.0 PU 1.0 PU

TRIP

Pickup

Figure 2-9 Tripping on Low Forward Power in Negative Direction (Toward Generator)

32 #1 PICKUP The reverse power pickup setting should be based on the type of
________ PU prime mover and the losses when the generator is motoring.

32 #1 DELAY Reverse power relays should always be applied with a time delay
________ Cycles in order to prevent mis-operation during power swing conditions.
Typical time delay settings are 20 to 30 seconds.

32#1 LOW FORWARD POWER When Low Forward Power is enabled, regardless of the direction
disable enable of power, the relay will trip when the real power measurement is
less than or equal to the pickup setpoint.

32 #2 PICKUP If used, positive direction power settings can be used for over-
________ PU load protection, providing either alarm or tripping or both, when
power equals or exceeds the setting. The pickup and time delay
settings should be based on the capability limit of the generator.

32 #2 DELAY A second reverse power setting can be used for sequential trip-
________ Cycles ping of the generator in which case the associated time delay
will be in the range of 2 to 3 seconds.

32#2 LOW FORWARD POWER

disable enable

2–19
 M-3425 Instruction Book

40 Loss of Field The settings of the offset mho elements should be

The Loss-of-Field function (40) provides protection such that the relay detects the loss-of-field condition
for a partial or complete loss of field. A variety of for any loading while not mis-operating during power
possible settings make the M-3425 Generator swings and fault conditions. Two approaches are
Protection Relay very flexible when applied to loss- widely used in the industry, both of which are
of-field generation. Ranges and increments are supported by the M-3425 relay. Both approaches
presented in Table 2-7. require knowledge of the reactances and other
parameters of the generator. They are described in
The loss-of-field function is implemented with two Figure 2-10, Loss of Field (40) — Protective
offset mho elements, an undervoltage element, and Approach I and Figure 2-11, Loss of Field (40) —
a directional element. The setting for each mho Protective Approach II.
element, diameter, offset, and time delay, are
adjusted individually. Voltage control may be enabled Impedance calculations for various VT connections
on each element but the voltage level setting is are shown in Table 2-2. All impedance settings are
common. When voltage control is enabled, the secondary relay quantities and can be derived from
measured positive sequence voltage must be less the following formula:
than the voltage control setting for the loss-of-field
Z SEC = ZPRI x (RC ÷ RV)
function to operate. The common directional unit is
provided to block the relay operation during slightly where ZSEC = secondary reflected impedance, ZPRI =
underexcited conditions (since approach #1 with primary impedance, RC = current transformer ratio,
negative offset is inherently directional, the and RV = voltage transformer ratio.
directional element is not required). The directional
unit’s zero sensitivity (torque) line is placed at –13°
from the R axis.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Los s of Fie ld (40)

0.1 to 100.0 Ω
Circle Diameter #1, #2 0.1 Ω
(0.5 to 500.0 Ω)

–50.0 to 50.0 Ω
Offset #1, #2 0.1 Ω
(–250.0 to 250.0 Ω)

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Voltage Control
5 to 180 V 1V
(positive sequence)
o
Directional Element Fixed at –13 –

Table 2-7 Loss-of-Field (40) Setpoint Ranges

2–20
 Application – 2

+X

Heavy Load Light Load

–X'd
2 13°
–R +R

1.0 pu Underexcited

Xd

Loss of Excitation
Final Impedance
Locus

Steady-State Stability Limit

Machine Capability

Minimum Exciter Limit

–X
Figure 2-10 Loss of Field (40)—Protective Approach 1

Directional Element +X

Block Direction
Heavy Load Light Load
Trip Direction
13° XT
–R +R
–X'd
2

Underexcited

1.1 Xd

Loss of Excitation
Final Impedance
Locus

Steady-State Stability Limit

Machine Capability

Minimum Exciter Limit

–X
Figure 2-11 Loss of Field (40)—Protective Approach 2

2–21
 M-3425 Instruction Book

40 #1 DIAMETER The first approach is shown in Figure 2-10, Loss of Field (40)
________ Ohms — Protective Approach I. Here, both of the offset mho elements
l l
(#1 and #2) are set with an offset of –X d÷2, where X d is the
direct axis transient reactance of the generator. The diameter of
40 #1 OFFSET the smaller circle (#1) is set at 1.0 pu impedance on the ma-
________ Ohms chine base. This mho element detects loss-of-field from full load
to about 30% load. A small time delay provides fast protection.

40 #1 VOLTAGE CONTROL The diameter of the larger circle (#2) is set equal to Xd, where Xd
disable enable is the direct axis synchronous reactance of the machine. This
mho element can detect a loss-of-field condition from almost no
load to full load. A time delay of 30 to 60 cycles (#2) should be
40 #1 DELAY used in order to prevent possible incorrect operation on stable
________ Cycles swings.

40 #2 DIAMETER The second approach is shown in Figure 2-11, Loss of Field

________ Ohms (40) – Protective Approach II. In this approach, one of the mho
l
elements is set with an offset of –X d ÷2, a diameter of
l
1.1 Xd-(X d÷2), and a time delay of 10 to 30 cycles. The second
element is set to coordinate with the generator minimum excitation
limit and steady-state stability limit.

40 #2 OFFSET In order to obtain proper coordination, the offset of this element

________ Ohms must be adjusted to be positive. Typically, the offset is set
equal to the unit transformer reactance (XT). The diameter is
approximately equal to (1.1 Xd + XT). A time delay of 30 to 60
cycles would prevent mis-operation on stable swings.

40 #2 VOLTAGE CONTROL Although the voltage control is common to both zones, either
disable enable one can be enabled or disabled and is typically set at 80% to
90% of the nominal voltage. The voltage control should be applied
after careful study of the system since, depending on the stiffness
40 #2 DELAY of the system, the voltage may not be reduced enough to operate
________ Cycles the undervoltage element during loss-of-field conditions.

40 VOLTAGE CONTROL
________ Volts

2–22
 Application – 2

46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent its 100% trip level. Figure 2-12, Negative Sequence
The Negative Sequence Overcurrent function Overcurrent Inverse Time Curves, illustrates the
provides protection against possible rotor inverse time characteristic of the negative sequence
overheating and damage due to unbalanced faults overcurrent function.
or other system conditions which can cause
Operating times are lower than that is shown in
unbalanced three phase currents in the generator.
Figure 2-12 when measured current values are
Ranges and increments are presented in Table 2-8.
greater than 15 A (3 A for 1 A rated circuit).
This function has a definite time element and an
The first task of setting this function is to determine
inverse time element. The definite time pickup value
the capabilities of the associated machine. As
and definite operating time are normally associated
established by ANSI standards, the machine limits
with an alarm function. The inverse time element is
are expressed as (I2)2t = K. The value of K is
usually associated with a trip function and has a
established by the machine design and is generally
pickup and an operating time defined by an (I2)2 t =
provided on test sheets of the machine. The relay
K, where K is the Time Dial Setting and I2 is the per
can accommodate any generator size because of
unit negative sequence current.
the wide range of K settings from 1 to 95. Typical
The minimum delay for the inverse time function is values can be found in ANSI C50.13-1977.
factory set at 12 cycles to avoid nuisance tripping.
The negative sequence pickup range is from 3% to
A maximum time to trip can be set to reduce the
100% of the Nominal Current value input during
operating times for modest imbalances. An important
system setup (see Section 2.1, Configuration).
feature that helps protect the generator from damage
due to recurring imbalances is a linear reset This protection must not operate for system faults
characteristic. When I2 decreases below the pickup that will be cleared by system relaying. This requires
value, the trip timer takes four minutes to reset from consideration of line protection, bus differential and
breaker failure backup protections.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Ne gative Se que nce Ove rcurre nt (46)

De finite Time

Pickup 3 to 100% 1%

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Inve rs e Time

Pickup 3 to 100% 1%

Time Dial Setting

1 to 95 1
(K=I22t)

De finite M aximum

Time to Trip 600 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle

Definite Minimum Time 12 Cycles Fixed

4 minutes
Reset Time (linear) –
(from threshold of trip)

Table 2-8 Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46) Setpoint Ranges

2–23
M-3425 Instruction Book

Pickup Setting Range

1000
800
To 65,500 cycles
600

400

200

Definite Maximum
100
Time Setting Range
80
60

40
Time (Seconds)

20

10
8
6 I22t=K
4

K
95
1 50
25
0.6
10
0.4 5
2
Definite 1
* 0.2 Minimum
Time
0.1
4 5 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1000 2000 3000 4000

Negative Sequence Current (% of Nominal Value)

Q NOTE: When the phase current exceeds 3X I nominal, the operating

times will be greater than those shown.

* 0.24 seconds for 50 Hz units.

Figure 2-12 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time Curves

46DT PICKUP The pickup setting is usually quite low (3–5%) and the output of this
________ % function is usually connected to alarm only.

46DT DELAY Time delay should be set high enough to avoid alarms on transients.
________ Cycles

46IT PICKUP The 46 Inverse Time pickup setting should coincide with the continuous
________ % negative sequence current capability of the generator operating at full
output.
46IT TIME DIAL The time dial setting corresponds to the K provided by the generator
________ manufacturer for the specific unit being protected. See Figure 2-12 for
the negative sequence overcurrent inverse time curves.

46IT MAX DELAY The maximum trip time is used to reduce the longer trip times asso-
________ Cycles ciated with low to moderate imbalances to a preset time.

2–24
 Application – 2

50/50N Instantaneous Overcurrent, Phase and

Neutral Circuits
The Instantaneous Phase (50) and Instantaneous
Neutral (50N) overcurrent functions provide fast
tripping for high fault currents. The settings of both
functions must be set such that they will not pickup
for fault or conditions outside the immediate
protective zone. If the neutral current input is
connected to step-up transformer’s neutral CT, the
50N function can be used as a breaker flashover
protection when used in conjunction with external
breaker failure protection. Ranges and Increments
are presented in Table 2-9.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Ins tantane ous Ove rcurre nt (50)

Pickup 0.1 to 240.0 A 0.1 A

(0.1 to 48.0 A)

Trip Time Response < 2 Cycles –

Ins tantane ous Ove rcurre nt, Ne utral (50N)

Pickup 0.1 to 240.0 A 0.1 A

(0.1 to 48.0 A)

Trip Time Response < 2 Cycles —

Table 2-9 Instantaneous Overcurrent (50/50N) Setpoint Ranges

50 PICKUP The relay current (IR) is equal to the primary current (Ip) divided
________ Amps by the appropriate CT ratio.

50N PICKUP
________ Amps

2–25
 M-3425 Instruction Book

50BF Generator Breaker Failure/HV Breaker Implementation of the generator breaker failure
Flashover function is illustrated in Figure 2-13. The breaker
The 50BF function is applicable when a generator failure timer will be started whenever any one of the
breaker is present and line side generator CTs are designated output contacts or the external
being used. The 50BF-Ph phase detector element programmed breaker failure initiate status input are
(if enabled) is used for breaker failure and the operated. The timer continues to time if any one of
50BF-N (if enabled) provides breaker flashover the phase currents are above the 50BF-Ph pickup
protection by providing an additional breaker failure setting or if the 52b contact indicates the breaker is
initiate which is only active when the breaker is still closed; otherwise, the timer is reset.
open. For high impedance grounded applications,
Since current in the generator high side CT which
the 50BF-N function is inapplicable and must be
energizes the 50BF protection (IA, IB, IC) might not
disabled. Ranges and increments are presented in
extinguish concurrently with the breaker opening for
Table 2-10, Breaker Failure (50BF) Setpoint Ranges.
faults between the CT location and the generator
50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure: When the breaker, a possible area of mis-operation exists.
M-3425 Generator Protection Relay detects an Usually the risk of faults in this limited area is small
internal fault or an abnormal operating condition, it enough to be ignored but should be considered.
closes an output contact to trip the generator breaker
50BF-Neutral Element: This instantaneous
or the unit HV breaker. When a generator breaker is
overcurrent relay is energized from the generator
used, protection is available for the instance where
neutral CT (See Figure 2-1, One-Line Functional
it fails to clear the fault or abnormal condition. Such
Diagram). This function is internally in series with a
generator breaker failure protection output contacts
breaker “b” contact (IN1) to provide logic for the
must be connected to trip the additional necessary
breaker flashover protection (see Figure 2-13).
breakers to isolate the generator from the system.
HV Breaker Failure (limited) The breaker failure
The breaker-failure condition is usually detected by
function may be used for a unit breaker rather than
the continued presence of current in any one or
a generator breaker. It is limited in that it has no
more of the phases after a breaker has been tripped.
fault detector associated with the unit breaker. Output
However, the current detector (50BF-Ph) may not
contact operation would occur if any of the initiate
always give the correct status of the breaker,
contacts close and the 52b contact indicated a
especially for generator breakers. This is because
closed breaker after the set time delay.
faults and abnormal operating conditions such as
ground faults, overexcitation, over/under frequency, This operation is chosen by disabling the neutral
and reverse power may not produce enough current element, disabling the phase element, and
to operate the current detectors. For this reason, designating initiating inputs and outputs and a time
the breaker status input 52b contact must be used, delay setting.
in addition to the 50BF-Ph, to provide adequate
breaker status indication.

50BF-Ph
Overcurrent
I>P.U. AND
OR
Phase Initiate Enable

IN1 (52b)
NOT
Logic high when breaker closed
Logic high
when breaker open

50BF-N
Overcurrent
I>P.U.
AND
Programmed
Neutral Initiate Enable
OR
AND DELAY
TIME
Output
Contacts
Output Initiate
Input Initiate

Figure 2-12 Breaker Failure Logic Diagram

2–26
 Application – 2

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Bre ake r Failure (50BF)

Pickup

Phase Current (50 BF- Ph) 0.10 to 10.00 A

0.01 A
(0.02 to 2.00 A)

Neutral Current (50 BF- N) 0.10 to 10.00 A

0.01 A
(0.02 to 2.00 A)

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Table 2-10 Breaker Failure (50BF) Setpoint Ranges

50BF NEUTRAL ELEMENT If the breaker flashover protection is to be used with the generator
disable enable breaker failure function of the relay, set ENABLE, set the neutral
pickup amps, and enable and set the phase element.

50BF PICKUP NEUTRAL

________ Amps

50BF PHASE ELEMENT If generator breaker failure function is used in this application, ENABLE
disable enable here and set phase pickup amps.

50BF PICKUP PHASE

________ Amps

50BF INPUT INITIATE Designate the status inputs which will initiate the breaker failure
i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 timer.

50BF OUTPUT INITIATE Designate the outputs that will initiate the breaker failure timer.
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

50BF DELAY For generator breaker failure protection, the time delay should be set
________ Cycles to allow for breaker operating time plus margin.

2–27
 M-3425 Instruction Book

50DT Definite Time Overcurrent (for split-phase Refer to Section 2.1, Configuration, Relay System
differential) Setup for a description of the 50DT Split-Phase
This function can be applied in two different Operate setting, and Section 2.2, System Diagrams.
configurations based on the CT connections. When
In some cases, the generators may be run with a
CT configuration shown in Figure 2-1, One Line
faulted turn shorted until the generator winding is
Functional Diagram is used, the 50DT function is
repaired. To prevent mis-operation under these
used as a definite time phase overcurrent function
conditions, the pickup setting of the faulted phase
to provide protection for external and internal faults
should be set higher than the other phases. To
in the generator. When the CTs are connected to
accommodate this function, individual pickup
measure the split phase differential current (shown
settings are available for each phase. Ranges and
in Figure 2-2, Alternative One Line Functional
increments are presented in Table 2-11.
Diagram), the 50DT function can be used as a split-
phase differential relay.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

De finite Time Ove rcurre nt (for s plit-phas e diffe re ntial) (50DT)

0.2 A to 240.0 A
Pickup Phase A #1, #2 0.1
(0.2 to 48.0 A)

0.2 A to 240.0 A
Pickup Phase B #1, #2 0.1
(0.2 to 48.0 A)

0.2 A to 240.0 A
Pickup Phase C #1, #2 0.1
(0.2 to 48.0 A)

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

When 50DT f unct ion is used f or split -phase dif f erent ial, 50BF, 87, and 87GD
f unct ions must be disabled.

Table 2-11 Definite Time Overcurrent (50DT) Setpoint Ranges

50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE A

________ Amps

50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE B

________ Amps

50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE C

________ Amps

50DT #1 DELAY
________ Cycles

2–28
 Application – 2

51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent

The Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent function (51N)
provides protection against ground faults. Since no
zero sequence or ground current is usually present
during normal operation, this function can be set for
greater sensitivity than the phase overcurrent
protection. If the 51N and 50N functions are not
used at the generator neutral, they can be used to
detect system ground faults by being energized by
the step-up transformer neutral CTs. Ranges and
increments are presented in Table 2-12.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Inve rs e Time N e utral Ove rcurre nt (51N)

0.25 to 12.00 A
Pickup 0.01A
(0.05 to 2.40 A)

Definite Time/Inverse/Very Inverse

Characteristic Curve
/Extremely Inverse/IEC Curves

0.5 to 11.0 0.1

Time Dial Setting
0.05 to 1.10 (IEC Curves) 0.01

Table 2-12 Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent (51N) Setpoint Range

51N PICKUP The relay current (IR) is equal to the primary current (IP) divided by the
________ Amps appropriate CT ratio. IR = IP ÷ CT ratio

51N CURVE Select one of the time curves shown in Appendix D, Inverse Time
def inv vinv einv J Curves. The appropriate curve in the selected family is designated
here.
Iieci iecvi iecei ieclt

51N TIME DIAL Appropriate Time Dial for coordination with “downstream” relay
________ protection chosen from the time curve above.

2–29
 M-3425 Instruction Book

51T Inverse Time Positive Sequence

Overcurrent (I2t=K) for Stator Thermal
Protection
The 51T function is designed to provide overload
protection. The function has a pickup setting and an
operating time at a current value of six (6) times
pickup as shown on Figure 2-14, Inverse Time Curve
— 51T. The inverse time curve is I2t=K, where I is
the positive sequence current. This curve is applicable
for coordination with the generator overheating
characteristics. In order to handle recurring overload
conditions, the function is provided with linear reset
rate of 4 minutes from its 100% trip level. Ranges
and increments are presented in Table 2-13.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Inve rs e Time Pos itive Se que nce Ove rcurre nt for Stator The rmal Prote ction (51T)

0.50 to 15.00 A
Pickup 0.01 A
(0.10 to 3.00 A)

Time Delay* 0.10 to 10.00 Sec 1 Cycle

Reset Characteristics
4 minutes from threshold of trip -
(Linear)

*This t ime delay is at six t imes t he pick up current .

Table 2-13 Inverse Time Positive Sequence Overcurrent (51T) Setpoint Ranges

51T PICKUP
________ Amps

51T DELAY @600% PICKUP This setting is the operating time of the function at six (6) times
________ Sec pickup value. This is illustrated in Figure 2-14, Inverse Time Curve
51T on the following page, where the operating time for all other
current values may be derived for coordination with other protec-
tions.

2–30
 Application – 2

100.0
80.0
60.0

40.0

20.0

I2t = K Curves
10.0
8.0
6.0

4.0
Time (Seconds)

2.0

1.0
0.8
0.6

0.4

0.2

0.1

0.06

0.04

0.02

0.01
1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 20.0

Current in Multiples of Pickup

Figure 2-13 Inverse Time Curve – 51T

2–31
 M-3425 Instruction Book

51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent with 51V is a true three-phase function, in that the relay
Voltage Control/Restraint incorporates separate integrating timers on each
Time-overcurrent relays, one per phase, are used to phase.
trip circuits selectively and to time-coordinate with
The inverse time overcurrent function can be voltage
other up- or downstream relays. For this function,
controlled (VC), voltage restrained (VR), or neither.
eight complete series of inverse time tripping
For voltage-controlled operation, the function is not
characteristics are included. The same descriptions
active unless the voltage is below the voltage control
and nomenclature which are traditionally used with
setpoint. This philosophy is used to confirm that the
electromechanical relays are used in the relay.
overcurrent is due to system fault. When applied,
Thus, the curve families to be chosen are definite
most users will set voltage control limits in the
time, inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse and
range of 0.7 to 0.01 per unit RMS voltage. When
four IEC curves. In the menu, these are abbreviated
voltage restraint is selected (See Figure 2-15,
as DEF, INV, VINV, EINV, IECI, IECVI, IECEI, and
Voltage Restraint (51VR) Characteristic), the pickup
IECLT. Within each family, the operator selects
setting is continuously modified in proportion to the
time dial setting and pickup (tap) setting, just as
collapsing terminal voltage. The voltage restraint
with electromechanical relays. Ranges and
function is well-suited to small generators with
increments are presented in Table 2-14.
relatively short time constants.
The curves available for use are shown in Appendix
The 51V function should be blocked by fuse loss if
D, Inverse Time Curves. They cover a range from
in the voltage control mode. Fuse loss blocking is
1.5 to 20 times the pickup setting. An additional one
not desirable for voltage restraint mode because
cycle time delay should be added to these curves in
the pickup is automatically held at 100% pickup
order to obtain the relay operating time. Inverse
during fuse loss conditions, and operation will
time curves saturate beyond 20 times pickup. For
continue as normal.
currents in excess of 20 times pickup, operating
times are fixed at the 20 time pickup level. The The internally derived voltage used to realize the
particular settings will be made by information from voltage control or restraint feature depends on the
short-circuit fault studies and knowledge of the configured VT configuration and the Delta-Y
coordination requirements with other devices in the Transform setting (see Section 2.1, Configuration,
system that respond to time overcurrent. Relay System Setup). Table 2-15, Delta/Wye
Transformer Voltage-Current Pairs describes the
calculation for the various system VT configurations.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Inve rs e Time Ove rcurre nt, with Voltage Control or Voltage Re s traint (51V)

0.50 to 12.00 A
Pickup 0.01 A
(0.10 to 2.40 A)

Definite Time/Inverse/Very Inverse

Characteristic Curve
/Extremely Inverse/IEC Curves

0.5 to 11.0 0.1

Time Dial
0.05 to 1.10 (IEC Curves) 0.01

Voltage Control (VC) 5 to 180 V 1V

or

Voltage Restraint (VR) Linear Restraint —

Table 2-14 Inverse Time Overcurrent with Voltage Control/Voltage Restraint (51VC/VR)
Setpoint Ranges

2–32
 Application – 2

Figure 2-14 Voltage Restraint (51VR) Characteristic

Ge ne rator Conne cte d Through

Ge ne rator Dire ctly Conne cte d
De lta/Wye Trans forme r
Voltage Control or Restraint Voltage Control or Restraint
Current Current
L- G L- L or L- G to L- L L- G L- L or L- G to L- L
Ia (VA / VC)/53 VAB Ia VA (VAB / VCA)/53
Ib (VB / VA)/53 VBC Ib VB (VBC / VAB)/53
Ic (VC / VB)/53 VCA Ic VC (VCA / VBC)/53

Table 2-15 Delta/Wye Transformer Voltage-Current Pairs

51V PICKUP The pickup of the 51V is set in relay amps.

________ Amps (Relay amps = primary amps ÷ CT ratio)

51V CURVE Selects one of the time curves as shown in Appendix D, Inverse
def inv vinv einvJ Time Curves. The appropriate curve in the selected family of curves
Iieci iecvi iecei ieclt is designated here.

51V TIME DIAL

________

51V VOLTAGE CONTROL Disable if neither voltage control nor voltage restraint is desired. If
disable v_cntl v_rstrnt voltage restraint is designated, the tap setting is modified as shown
in Figure 2-14. If voltage control is designated, the 51V will only
operate when the voltage is less than the 51V voltage control setting
51V VOLTAGE CONTROL
specified below. When applied, the voltage control is usually set in
________ Volts
the range of 70% to 90% of the nominal voltage.

2–33
 M-3425 Instruction Book

50/27 Inadvertent Energizing While the machine is accelerating, high currents

The inadvertent energizing protection function (50/27) induced into the rotor can cause significant damage
of the relay is an overcurrent function supervised by in a matter of seconds. Voltage supervised
generator terminal bus voltage. Inadvertent or overcurrent logic is designed to provide this
accidental energizing of off-line generators has protection. (See Figure 2-16, Inadvertent Energizing
occurred frequently enough to warrant the use of Function Logic Diagram)
dedicated protection logic to detect this condition.
An undervoltage element (all three phase voltages
Operating errors, breaker flashovers, control circuit
must be below pickup) with adjustable pickup and
malfunctions or a combination of these causes
dropout time delay supervises instantaneous
have resulted in generators being accidentally
overcurrent tripping. The undervoltage detectors
energized while off-line. The problem is particularly
automatically arm the overcurrent tripping when the
prevalent on large generators connected through a
generator is taken off-line. This undervoltage detector
high voltage disconnect switch to either a ring bus
will disable or disarm the overcurrent operation
or breaker-and-a-half bus configuration. When a
when the machine is put back in service. Ranges
generator is accidentally energized from the power
and increments are presented in Table 2-16.
system, it will accelerate like an induction motor.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Inadve rte nt Ene rgizing (50/27)

Ove rcurre nt (50)

Pickup 0.50 to 15.00 A

0.01 A
(0.10 to 3.00 A)

Unde rvoltage (27)

Pickup 40 to 130 V 1V

Pickup Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Drop- out Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Table 2-16 Inadvertent Energizing (50/27) Setpoint Ranges

2–34
 Application – 2

50
Overcurrent
I>PU
Programmed
AND Output
Contacts
Pickup
27 Delay
Undervoltage*
V<PU Dropout
Delay

* On All Three Phases Simultaneously

Figure 2-15 Inadvertent Energizing Function Logic Diagram

50/27 PICKUP Typical pickup setting is 0.5 amps. No coordination is required

________ Amps with other protection since this function is only operational when
the generator is off-line.

The purpose of the undervoltage detector is to determine whether

50/27 VOLTAGE CONTROL
________ Volts the unit is connected to the system. The voltage level during this
accidental energization depends on the system strength. Typical
setting is 50%–70% of rated voltage.

50/27 PICKUP DELAY The pickup time delay is the time for the unit to operate to arm
________ Cycles the protection. It must coordinate with other protection for condi-
tions which cause low voltages.

50/27 DROPOUT DELAY The dropout time delay is the time for the unit to operate to
________ Cycles disarm the protection when the voltage is increased above the
pickup value or the generator is brought on-line.

2–35
 M-3425 Instruction Book

59 RMS Overvoltage, 3-Phase Magnitude measurement depends on the 59/27

The RMS Overvoltage function may be used to Magnitude Select setting (See Section 2.1,
provide overvoltage protection for the generator. Configuration, Relay System Setup). When the RMS
The relay provides overvoltage protection functions option is selected, the magnitude calculation is
with two voltage levels and two definite-time accurate over a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz)
setpoints, either of which can be programmed to trip and the accuracy of the time delay is +20 cycles. If
the unit or send an alarm. This is a true 3-phase DFT option is selected, the magnitude calculation
function in that each phase has an independent is accurate near 50 or 60 Hz, and the timer accuracy
timing element. is &1 cycle. Ranges and increments are presented
in Table 2-17.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

RM S Ove rvoltage (59)

Pickup #1, #2 5 to 180 V 1V

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Table 2-17 RMS Overvoltage, 3-Phase (59) Setpoint Ranges

59 #1 PICKUP Generator capability is generally 105% of rated voltage.

________ Volts

59 #1 DELAY
________ Cycles

59 #2 PICKUP
________ Volts

59 #2 DELAY
________ Cycles

2–36
 Application – 2

59N RMS Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero

Sequence
The Neutral Overvoltage function (59N) provides
stator ground-fault protection for high-impedance
grounded generators. The 59N function can provide
ground-fault protection for 90–95% of the stator
winding (measured from the terminal end).
The 59N function provides two setpoints, and
responds only to the fundamental frequency
component, rejecting all other harmonic components.
Ranges and increments are presented in Table 2-18.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

RM S Ove rvoltage , Ne utral (59N)

Pickup #1, #2 5.0 to 180.0 V 0.1 V

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Table 2-18 RMS Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence (59N) Setpoint Ranges

With typical distribution transformer ratios and a typical mini-

59N #1 PICKUP
mum setting of 5 volts, this protection is capable of detecting
________ Volts
ground faults in about 95% of the generator stator winding from
the terminal end.

If grounded-wye to grounded-wye VTs are connected at the

59N #1 DELAY
machine terminals, the voltage relay must be time coordinated
________ Cycles
with VT fuses for faults on the transformer secondary winding.
If relay time delay for coordination is not acceptable, the
59N #2 PICKUP coordination problem can be alleviated by grounding one of the
________ Volts secondary phase conductors instead of the secondary neutral.
When this technique is used, the coordination problem still exists
59N #2 DELAY for ground faults on the secondary neutral. Thus, its usefulness
________ Cycles is limited to those applications where the exposure to ground
faults on the secondary neutral is small.

Since system ground faults can induce zero sequence voltages

at the generator due to transformer capacitance coupling, this
relay must coordinate with the system ground fault relaying.

2–37
 M-3425 Instruction Book

60FL Fuse Loss Inputs. Other functions in the relay may be

Since some functions may inadvertently operate programmed to be blocked by the fuse-loss detection
when a VT fuse is blown, provisions are incorporated logic. Again, in cases where the internal logic is not
for both internal and external fuse loss detection. considered to be reliable, the FL blocking selection
should not be chosen.
For internal detection of a fuse-loss condition,
positive and negative sequence quantities are The 60FL function can also be initiated via the
compared. The presence of negative sequence external status inputs, thus accommodating other
voltage in the absence of negative sequence current fuse loss detection schemes. Any combination (“OR”
is considered to be a fuse loss condition. An logic) of status input (IN1 through IN6) may be used
additional supervising condition includes a minimum to initiate operation.
positive sequence voltage to assure VT inputs are
A timer associated with the fuse loss logic is
being applied to the relay.
available. This timer is to assure proper coordination
For the specific application where the above logic for conditions which may appear as a fuse loss,
cannot be considered reliable (such as when current such as secondary VT circuit faults which will be
inputs to the relay are not connected, sustained cleared by local low voltage circuit action. Ranges
positive sequence current during fault conditions is and increments are presented in Table 2-19.
minimal, or negative sequence currents are not
present during fault conditions), provision is made
for ignoring the fuse-loss internal logic by not
highlighting “FL” from among the 60FL Input Initiate

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

VT Fus e –Los s De te ction (60FL)

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Table 2-19 Fuse Loss (60FL) Setpoint Ranges

60FL INPUT INITIATE The initiating inputs are user-designated. The closing of any of the
FL i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 externally-connected contacts (across these inputs) will start the
associated time delay to the 60FL function operation. Designating
FL will initiate this function with the internal logic. Externally initi-
ated fuse loss detection may be input to other status inputs.

60FL DELAY The time delay is set to coordinate for conditions which may ap-
________ Cycles pear as a fuse loss but will be corrected by other protection (such
as a secondary VT circuit fault which will be cleared by local low
voltage circuit action).

2–38
 Application – 2

64B Brush Lift-Off Detection 1. After installation has been completed,

The Brush Lift-Off Detection (64B) provides detection determine the rotor capacitance, as outlined
of open brushes of the rotor shaft. This function works for the 64F function on page 2-41.
in conjunction with the 64F Field Ground Detection 2. With the machine still off-line, apply power
function, and requires the M-3921 Field Ground Coupler. to the relay and set the 64B/F operating
To improve accuracy and minimize the effects of frequency in accordance with the value
stray capacitance, the M-3921 Field Ground Coupler listed in Table 2-23, Typical Frequency
should be mounted close to the exciter. Connections Settings.
from the coupler to the relay should use low capacitance
3. Introduce the brush-open condition by
shielded cable, and be as short as possible. Cable disconnecting the rotor brushes or lifting
shield should be terminated at the relay end to terminal the brushes from their ground. Observe
36 (See Figure 5-5, External Connections). If cabling the 64B voltage value displayed by IPScom
between the coupler and relay exceeds 100 feet, or the relay. The displayed value is the
provisions are made for in circuit calibration to nullify actual measured operating value of the
the effects of cabling capacitance. See Section 6.3, 64B function.
Auto Calibration, for calibration procedure.
4. To ensure correct operation and prevent
When 64B operates, indicating open brush conditions, erroneous trips, the Pickup Setting for the
the 64F function cannot detect field ground. For 64B Lift-off condition should be set at 80–
most generators, when the brushes of the rotor shaft 90% of the actual operating value.
are lifted, the capacitance across the field winding
and the ground significantly reduces to less than The 64B/F Frequency is a shared setting common to
0.15 μF. The 64B function analyzes this capacitance- both the 64B and 64F functions. If either function is
related signal, and initiates an output contact when it enabled, this setpoint is available, and should be set
detects an open brush condition. Typically, this output to compensate for the amount of capacitance across
is used to alert the operating personnel of an open the field winding and ground, so that the function
brush condition. Ranges and increments are accuracy is improved.
presented in Table 2-20. The typical pickup settings
for different open brush capacitances are listed in 64B PICKUP
Table 2-21, Typical Brush Lift-Off Settings. ________ mV

In order to assure correct setting, it is recommended

that the actual operating value be predetermined 64B DELAY
during the final stage of the relay installation. By ________ cycles
introducing the brush-open condition, the actual value
can be easily obtained from the relay. The following
64B/F FREQUENCY
procedure can be used to obtain the actual operating
value of the 64B during brushes open condition: ________ Hz

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Brus h Lift-Off De te ction (64B)

Pickup 0 to 5000 mV 1 mV

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Table 2-20 Brush Lift-Off Detection (64B) Setpoint Ranges

Typical Brus h Lift-Off

Equivale nt Brus h Lift-Off Capacitance
Pickup Se tting

0.05~0.25 μF 2500 mV

Table 2-21 Typical Brush Lift-Off Settings

2–39
 M-3425 Instruction Book

64F Field Ground Protection

The Field Ground function provides detection of
insulation breakdown between the excitation field
winding and the ground. There are two pickup and
time delay settings, and one adjustable injection
frequency setting for the 64F function. The adjustable
frequency is provided to compensate for the amount
of capacitance across the field winding and the
ground so that the function accuracy is improved.
Ranges and increments are presented in Table 2-22.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Fie ld Ground Prote ction (64F)

Pickup #1, #2 5 to 100 KΩ 1 KΩ

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Injection Frequency 0.10 to 1.00 Hz 0.01 Hz

Requires ex t ernal coupler module (M-3921) t o prov ide isolat ion f rom dc f ield
v olt ages.

Table 2-22 Field Ground Protection (64F) Setpoint Ranges

Exciter

PROTECTION RELAY + _
M-3425

TB3 Brushes
Squarewave Vout
Generator 37 TB5 Gen.
Rotor
Vin
35 TB4 TB2
Return Signal
Measurement
M-3921 Coupler
Vf

GND
36 TB1 TB1

Shield

Ground/Machine Frame

Figure 2-16 M-3921 Field Ground Coupler

2–40
 Application – 2

8 WARNING: Machine should be off-line and

field excitation should be off during the
capacitance measurement.

The following table gives typical frequency settings

based on the rotor capacitance. The rotor
capacitance can be measured with a capacitance
meter by connecting the meter across the field
winding to ground.

Fie ld Winding to
Typical Fre que ncy Se tting
Ground Capacitance

1 to 2 μF 0.52 Hz

2 to 3 μF 0.49 Hz

3 to 4 μF 0.46 Hz

4 to 5 μF 0.43 Hz

5 to 6 μF 0.39 Hz

6 to 7 μF 0.35 Hz

7 to 8 μF 0.32 Hz

8 to 9 μF 0.30 Hz

9 to 10 μF 0.28 Hz

>10 μF 0.26 Hz

Table 2-23 Typical Frequency Settings

64F #1 PICKUP
________ kOhm

64F #1 DELAY
________ Cycles

64F #2 PICKUP
________ kOhm

64F #2 DELAY
________ Cycles

To minimize measurement errors, the 64B/F frequency should be set

64B/F FREQUENCY
according to the amount of capacitance across the field winding and
________ Hz
the ground. Table 2-23, above, has typical settings of the frequency
for capacitance, ranging from 1 μF to 10 μF.

2–41
 M-3425 Instruction Book

78 Out-of-Step Consider, for example, Figure 2-18. If the out-of-

The Out-of-Step function (78) is used to protect the step swing progresses to impedance Z0(t0), the
generator from out-of-step or pole slip conditions. MHO element and the blinder A element will both
This function uses one set of blinders, along with a pick up. As the swing proceeds and crosses blinder
supervisory MHO element. Ranges and increments B at Z1(t1), blinder B will pick up. When the swing
are presented in Table 2-24. reaches Z2(t2), blinder A will drop out. If TRIP ON
MHO EXIT option is disabled and the timer has
The pickup area is restricted to the shaded area in expired (t2–t1>time delay), then the trip circuit is
Figure 2-18, Out-of-Step Relay Characteristics, complete. If the TRIP ON MHO EXIT option is
defined by the inner region of the MHO circle, the enabled and the timer has expired, then for the trip
region to the right of the blinder A and the region to to occur the swing must progress and cross the
the left of blinder B. For operation of the blinder MHO circle at Z3(t3) where the MHO element drops
scheme, the operating point (positive sequence out. Note the timer is active only in the pickup
impedance) must originate outside either blinder A region (shaded area). If the TRIP ON MHO EXIT
or B, and swing through the pickup area for a time option is enabled, a more favorable tripping angle is
greater than or equal to the time delay setting and achieved, which reduces the breaker tripping duty.
progress to the opposite blinder from where the The relay can also be set with a Pole Slip Counter.
swing had originated. When this scenario happens, The relay will operate when the number of pole slips
the tripping circuit is complete. The contact will are greater than the setting, provided the Pole Slip
remain closed for the amount of time set by the Reset Time was not expired. Typically, the Pole
seal-in timer delay. Slip Counter is set to 1, in which case the Pole Slip
Reset Time is not applicable.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Out-of-Ste p (78)

0.1 to 100.0 Ω
Circle Diameter 0.1 Ω
(0.5 to 500.0 Ω)

–100.0 to 100.0 Ω
Offset 0.1 Ω
(–500.0 to 500.0 Ω)

Impedance Angle 0o to 90o 1o

0.1 to 50.0 Ω
Blinder 0.1 Ω
(0.5 to 250.0 Ω)

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Pole Slip Counter 1 to 20 1

Pole Slip Reset 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Table 2-24 Out-of-Step (78) Setpoint Ranges

2–42
 Application – 2

A B

Z3(t3)

Z0(t0)

Z2(t2)
Z1(t1)

Figure 2-17 Out-of-Step Relay Characteristics

78 DIAMETER
________ Ohms

78 OFFSET A negative or positive offset can be specified to offset the

________ Ohms mho circle from the origin.

The blinder impedance should be programmed less than the

78 BLINDER IMPEDANCE
set diameter.
________ Ohms

78 IMPEDANCE ANGLE
________ Degrees

78 DELAY
________ Cycles

78 TRIP ON MHO EXIT

disable enable

78 POLE SLIP COUNT

________ slips

78 POLE SLIP RESET TIME

________ Cycles

2–43
 M-3425 Instruction Book

81 Frequency The steam turbine is usually considered to be more

The Frequency function (81) provides either restrictive than the generator at reduced frequencies
overfrequency or underfrequency protection of the because of possible natural mechanical resonance
generator. It has four independent pickup and time in the many stages of the turbine blades. If the
delay settings. The overfrequency mode is generator speed is close to the natural frequency of
automatically selected when the frequency setpoint any of the blades, there will be an increase in
is programmed higher than the base frequency (50 vibration. Cumulative damage due to this vibration
or 60 Hz), and the underfrequency mode selected can lead to cracking of the blade structure.
when the setpoint is programmed below the base
Sample settings of the 81 function are shown in
frequency. Ranges and increments are presented in
Figure 2-19. The frequency functions are
Table 2-25.
automatically disabled when the input voltage
(positive sequence) is less than about 5 V.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Fre que ncy (81)

Pickup #1, #2, #3, #4 50.00 to 67.00 Hz

0.01 Hz
40.00 to 57.00 Hz*

Time Delay #1,#2, #3, #4 2 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle

*This range applies t o 50 Hz nominal f requency models.

Table 2-25 Frequency (81) Setpoint Ranges

Over Frequency
Magnitude #1 Trip
61.0
Over Frequency (Hz)

60.8
60.6
81

60.4 Over Frequency

Magnitude #2
60.2 Over Frequency Over Frequency
Time Delay #1 Time Delay #2
60.0 Time (cycles)
Under Frequency Under Frequency
Time Delay #4 Time Delay #3
Under Frequency (Hz)

59.8
Under Frequency
Magnitude #3
59.6
81

59.4
59.2
Under Frequency
59.0
Magnitude #4 Trip

Figure 2-19 Example of Frequency (81) Trip Characteristics

2–44
 Application – 2

81 #1 PICKUP These magnitude and time settings describe a curve (as shown in
________ Hz Figure 2-19, Example of Frequency (81) Trip Characteristics) which
is to be coordinated with the capability curves of the turbine and
generator as well as the system underfrequency load-shedding pro-
81 #1 DELAY gram. These capabilities are given by a description of areas of pro-
________ Cycles hibited operation, restricted time operation, and continuous allow-
able operation.

81 #2 PICKUP The underfrequency function is usually connected to trip the machine

________ Hz whereas the overfrequency function is generally connected to an
alarm.

81 #2 DELAY In order to prevent mis–operation during switching transients, the

________ Cycles time delay should be set to greater than five (5) cycles.

81 #3 PICKUP
________ Hz

81 #3 DELAY
________ Cycles

81 #4 PICKUP
________ Hz

81 #4 DELAY
________ Cycles

2–45
 M-3425 Instruction Book

81R Rate of Change of Frequency

The Rate of Change of Frequency function (81R)
can be used for load shedding applications.
The function also has an automatic disable feature,
to disable 81R function during unbalanced faults
and other system disturbances. This feature uses
negative sequence voltage to block 81R function.
When the measured negative sequence voltage
exceeds the inhibit setting, the function 81R is
blocked. The time delay and magnitude settings of
81R should be based on simulation studies. The
ranges and increments are presented in Table 2-26,
below.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Rate of Change of Fre que ncy (81R)

Pickup #1, #2 0.10 to 20.00 Hz/Sec 0.01 Hz/Sec

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Negative Sequence
0 to 99 % 1%
Voltage Inhibit

Table 2-26 Rate of Change of Frequency (81R) Setpoint Ranges

81R #1 PICKUP
________ Hz/s

81R #1 DELAY
________ Cycles

81R #2 PICKUP
________ Hz/s

81R #2 DELAY
________ Cycles

81R NEG SEQ VOLT INHIBIT

________ %

2–46
 Application – 2

87GD Ground (Zero Sequence) Differential The advantage of directional sensitivity is the security
The Zero Sequence Differential function (87GD) against ratio errors and CT saturation during faults
provides ground fault protection for low impedance external to the protected generator.
grounded generator applications. High sensitivity
The directional element is inoperative if the residual
and fast operation can be obtained using this
current (3I0 ) is approximately less than 0.2 A, in
function. Ranges and increments are presented in
which case the algorithm automatically disables the
Table 2-27.
directional element and the 87GD function becomes
The relay provides a CT Ratio Correction Factor non-directional differential. The pickup quantity is
(RC) which removes the need for auxiliary CTs when then calculated as the difference between the
the phase and neutral CT ratios are different. corrected triple zero-sequence current (RC3I0) and
the neutral current (IN). The magnitude of the
When the system can supply zero sequence current difference x(RC3I0–IN)x is compared to the relay
to the ground fault (such as when several generators pickup.
are bussed together), the 87GD function operates
directionally. The directional element calculates the For security purposes during external high phase-
product (–3I0INCosØ) for directional indication. The fault current causing CT saturation, this function is
relay will operate only if I0 (Zero sequence current disabled any time the value of IN is less than
derived from phase CTs) and IN (Neutral current approximately 0.20 amps.
from Neutral CT) have the opposite polarity, which
is the case for internal generator faults.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Ground Diffe re ntial (87GD)

0.20 to 10.00 A
Pickup 0.01
(0.04 to 2.00 A)

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

CT Ratio Correction (RC) 0.10 to 7.99 0.0 1

Table 2-27 Ground Differential (87GD) Setpoint Ranges

87GD PICKUP A typical setting is 0.2 amps. (Relay amps = primary amps ÷ CT
________ Amps ratio.) For higher values of RC, noise may create substantial differential
current making higher pickup settings desirable.

S CAUTION: DO NOT set the Delay to less than 2 cycles.

87GD DELAY
________ Cycles In order to prevent mis-operation during external faults with CT
saturation conditions, a time delay of 6 cycles or higher is
recommended.

87GD C.T. RATIO CORRECT CT Ratio Correction Factor = (Phase CT Ratio)/(Neutral CT Ratio)
________

2–47
 M-3425 Instruction Book

87 Phase Differential the current out. Even though the percentage differential
The phase differential function (87) is a percentage relay is more tolerant of CT errors, all CTs should
differential with an adjustable slope of 1–100%. have the same characteristics and accuracies.
Although this protection is used to protect the
To provide restraint for CT saturation at high offset
machine from all internal winding faults, single-
currents, the slope is automatically adjusted (at a
phase to ground faults in machines with high
restraining current equal to two times nominal current)
impedance grounding may have currents less than
to four times the slope setting, see Figure 2-20 below.
the sensitivity of the differential relay (typically
between 3 and 30 primary amps). Ranges and For very high currents in large generators, the
increments are presented in Table 2-28. proximity of CTs and leads in different phases can
cause unbalanced currents to flow in the secondaries.
Turn-to-turn faults are not detected by differential
These currents must be less than the minimum
relays because the current into the generator equals
sensitivity of the relay.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Phas e Diffe re ntial Curre nt (87)

Minimum Pickup 0.20 A to 3.00 A

0.01 A
(0.04 to 0.60 A)

Percent Slope 1 to 100% 1%

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

When a t ime delay of 1 cycle is select ed, t he response t ime is less t han 1-1/2
cycles.

Table 2-28 Differential (87) Setpoint Ranges

SLOPE
TRIP (4xset)

(IA-Ia),
(IB-Ib),
BLOCK
(IC-Ic)
SLOPE
(set)
MIN PU @ IRES=2xINOM
Restraint Current
(IA+Ia)/2, (IB+Ib)/2, (IC+Ic)/2

Where IA and Ia are generator high side and neutral side currents respectively.
Figure 2-20 Differential Relay (87) Operating Characteristics

87 PICKUP A typical setting is 0.2 to 0.3 amps.

________ Amps

87 SLOPE A typical setting is 10%.

________ %

A typical setting is 3 to 5 cycles. Typical settings given above assume

87 DELAY
matched current transformer performance, and that transformer inrush of
________ Cycles
the unit transformer does not cause dc saturation of the generator CTs. If
there is a significant difference in current transformer ratings (C800 vs
C200, for example), or if saturation of the generator CTs is expected
during energizing of the step up transformer, more appropriate settings
might be 0.5 A pick up, 20% slope, and a delay of 5 to 8 cycles.

2–48
 Application – 2

External Functions
The M-3425 Generator Protection Relay provides
two “external functions” to allow external device
contacts to trip through the relay. These functions
expand the relay’s capability by providing additional
operating logic and target information for external
devices. The initiating inputs are designated to
provide external stimulus to start the function. The
designated blocking inputs and output contacts, as
specified in Section 2.1, Configuration, can be used
to provide additional logic.

FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE INCREM ENT

Exte rnal Functions

Two f unct ions are prov ided f or ex t ernally connect ed dev ices t o t rip t hrough
t he M-3425 t o prov ide addit ional logic and t arget inf ormat ion. Any one or
more of t he input cont act s (INPUT1 t hrough INPUT6) can be programmed
t o act iv at e designat ed out put cont act s af t er a select ed t ime delay.

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle

Table 2-29 External Functions Setpoint Range

EXT #1 INPUT INITIATE The initiating inputs are user-designated for each enabled external
i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 function. The operation of any externally connected contact (across
these M-3425 inputs) will start the external function timer operation.

EXT #1 DELAY Each enabled external function requires a time delay setting.
________ Cycles

EXT #2 INPUT INITIATE For the following example of the setup of an external function (see
i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 Figure 2-21, External Function Example), the function is ENABLED.
The designated initiating contacts as described here are IN2 and
IN5. The designated blocking status input is IN3, and the designated
output contact for the function is OUT6.

EXT #2 DELAY A time delay setting is also required. The only logical limitation is
________ Cycles that the same status input cannot be both a designated initiating
input and a designated blocking input.

2–49
M-3425 Instruction Book

Designated Designated
Initating Blocking Designated
Contacts Contacts Output Contact

IN1 IN1 OUT 1

IN2 IN2 OUT 2

Designated
IN3 IN3 Output Contact OUT 3

IN4 IN4 EXT# OUT 4

IN5 IN5 OUT 5

IN6 IN6 OUT 6

FL
OUT 7

OUT 8

IN3 NOT

IN2
EXT OUTPUT
OR AND Timer CONTACT 6
IN5

Figure 2-21 External Function Example

2–50
 Operation – 3

3 Operation

3.1 Front Panel Controls ............................................................................ 3–1

3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/Settings ........................................................... 3–3
3.3 Status/Metering .................................................................................... 3–8
3.4 Target History ...................................................................................... 3–8

This chapter contains information that describes Screen Blanking

the operation, direct setting, and configuration of The display will automatically blank after exiting
the M-3931 Human Machine Interface Module (HMI) from the Main Menu, or from any screen after five
and M-3925 Target modules. It further describes (5) minutes of unattended operation. To wake up
the procedures for entering all required data to the the display, the user must press any key except
relay. Included in this chapter is a description of the EXIT.
process necessary for review of setpoints and timing,
monitoring function status and metering quantities,
viewing the target history, and setup of the Arrow Push-buttons
oscillograph recorder. The left and right arrow buttons are used to choose
among menu selections displayed. When entering
values, the left and right arrow buttons are used to
3.1 Front Panel Controls select the digit (by moving the cursor) of the
displayed setpoint that will be increased or
decreased by the use of the up and down buttons.
The relay has been designed to be set and
interrogated locally with the optional HMI panel. An The up and down arrow buttons increase or decrease
integral part of this design is the layout and function input values or change between upper and lower
of the front panel indicators and controls, illustrated case inputs. If the up or down button is pressed
in Figure 3-1. when adjusting numerical values, the speed of
increment or decrement is increased.
Alphanumeric Display
To assist the operator in setting and interrogating EXIT Button
the relay locally, the display shows menus which The EXIT button is used to exit from a displayed
guide the operator to the desired function or screen and move up the menu tree. Any changed
setpoint value. These menus consist of two lines. setpoint will not be saved if the selection is aborted
The bottom line lists lower case abbreviations of via the EXIT button.
each menu selection with the chosen menu
selection shown in uppercase. The top menu line
ENTER Button
provides a description of the chosen menu
selection. The ENTER button is used to choose a highlighted
menu selection, to replace a setpoint or other
programmable value with the currently displayed
value, or to move down within the menu tree.

3–1
M-3425 Instruction Book

Target & Status Indicators and Controls Diagnostic LED

The target/status indicators and controls consist of The diagnostic DIAG LED flashes upon detection of
the POWER SUPPLY (2) LEDs, RELAY OK LED, a self-test error. The LED will flash the Error Code
the OSCILLOGRAPH TRIG LED, BREAKER number; for example, for Error Code 32, the LED
CLOSED LED, TARGET LED, DIAGNOSTIC LED will flash 3 times, followed by a short pause, and
and TIME SYNC LED. then 2 flashes, followed by a long pause, and then
repeat. For units equipped with the HMI, the Error
Power Supply #1 (#2) LED Code number is also displayed on the screen.
The green PS LED indicator will remain lit for the
appropriate power supply whenever power is applied Accessing Screens
to the unit and the power supply is operating correctly. To prevent unauthorized access to relay functions,
A second power supply is available as an option. the unit has the provision for assigning access
codes. If access codes have been assigned, the
Relay OK LED access code entry screen will be displayed after
ENTER is pressed from the default message
The green RELAY OK LED is under control of the screen.
relay's microprocessor. A flashing RELAY OK LED
indicates proper program cycling. The LED can
also be programmed to be continuously lit. Default Message Screens
When powered up, the relay performs a number of
Oscillograph Recorded LED self-tests to ensure its correct operation. During the
self-tests, the display shows an “x” for each test
The red OSC TRIG LED will light to indicate that successfully executed. If all tests are executed
oscillograph data has been recorded in the unit’s successfully, it will briefly display the word PASS
memory and is available for download. and then a series of status screens, including the
model number, the software version number, the
Breaker Closed LED serial number, the date and time as set in the
The red BRKR CLOSED LED will light to indicate system clock, and the user logo screen. If any test
when the breaker status input IN1 (52b) is open. should fail, an error code will be displayed and the
relay will not allow operation to proceed. In such a
case, the error code should be noted and the factory
Target Indicators and Target Reset contacted. A list of error codes and their descriptions
Upon any condition which causes the operation of are provided in Appendix C, Error Codes.
outputs 1 through 8, the TARGET LED will light,
indicating a relay operation. The TARGET LED will When the relay is powered and unattended, user
remain lit until the condition causing the trip is cleared, logo lines are blanked.
and the operator presses the TARGET RESET button.
If a function has operated and the targets have not
For units equipped with the optional M-3925 Target
module, additional targeting information is available. been reset, the display will show the time and date of
The Target module includes an additional 24 target the operation and automatically cycle through screens
for each applicable target (see Figure 3-2). Pressing
LEDs, and 8 output status LEDs. LEDs corresponding
ENTER will begin local mode operation, displaying
to the particular operated function as well as the
the access code entry screen or, if access codes
present state of the outputs are available. Pressing
have been disabled, the first level menu.
and holding the TARGET RESET button will display
the present pickup status for all functions available on Figure 3-3 presents the main menu flow map for
the Target module. This is a valuable diagnostic tool HMI-equipped units. This map can be used as a
which may be used during commissioning and testing. quick reference guide to aid in navigating the relay's
menus.
Time Sync LED
The green TIME SYNC LED will light to indicate
that the IRIG-B time signal is received and the
internal clock is synchronized with the IRIG-B time
signal. IRIG-B time information is used to accurately
tag target and oscillograph events.

3–2
 Operation – 3

The general information required to complete the

3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/ input data in this section includes:
Settings
Access Codes: The relay has three levels of access
codes. Depending on their assigned code, users
The M-3425 Generator Protection Relay is shipped have varying levels of access to the installed
from the factory with all functions disabled (user will functions.
only be able to enable purchased functions). The
following is a suggested setup procedure for initially 1. Level 1 access = Read setpoints,
entering settings into the relay. While written for HMI- monitor status, view target history.
equipped units, the same procedure applies when 2. Level 2 access = All of level 1 privileges,
setting the relay through remote communication. plus read & change setpoints, target
Following the steps outlined below are several sections history, set time clock.
which give additional detail concerning the settings
required for proper commissioning. 3. Level 3 access = All of level 2 privileges,
plus access to all configuration functions
Configuration Record forms are available in Appendix and settings.
A, Configuration Record Forms, to record settings
for future reference.
Each access code is a user-defined one- to four-
digit number. Access codes can only be altered by
1. Enter the Setup Unit data. This is general a level 3 user.
information required including altering
access codes, setting date and time, If the level 3 access code is set to 9999, the
defining user logos, and other access code feature is disabled. When access
adjustments. See Section 3.2, Setup codes are disabled, the access screens are
Unit Data subsection. bypassed, and all users have full access to all the
2. Configure the Setup System data. This is relay menus. The relay is shipped from the factory
the general system and equipment with the access code feature disabled.
information required for operation, including User Control Number: This is a user-defined value
such items as CT and VT ratios, VT which can be used for inventory or identification. The
configuration, and Nominal values. See
relay does not use this value, but it is exposed via the
Section 3.2, Setup System Data subsection.
communications interface, and can be read remotely.
3. Enable the desired functions and
elements. See Section 3.2, Configure User Logo: The user logo is a programmable, two-
Relay Data subsection. line by 24-character string, which can be used to
identify the relay, and which is displayed locally
4. Enter the desired setpoints for the when the relay is idle. This information is also
enabled functions. See Section 3.2, available remotely.
Setpoints and Time Settings subsection.
5. Enter configuration information for the Date and Time: This screen is used to view and set
oscillograph recorder. See Section 3.2, the relay's internal time of day clock. The clock is
Oscillograph Recorder Data subsection. used to time stamp system events such as trip and
oscillograph operations. The clock is disabled when
6. If remote communication is used, set shipped from the factory (indicated by “80” seconds
the parameters as needed. See Section appearing on the clock) to preserve battery life. If the
3.2, Communications Data subsection, relay is to be unpowered for an extended length of
or in Chapter 4, Remote Operation. time, the clock should be stopped (see Diagnostic
Mode). If the IRIG-B interface is used, the hours,
Setup Unit Data minutes, and seconds information in the clock will be
To input the data, access the SETUP UNIT menu synchronized with IRIG-B time information every
as follows: hour. The IRIG-B signal will provide the relay with an
additional 3 digits of time information. With IRIG-B,
1. Press ENTER to bring up the main events are tagged to the nearest millisecond, but
menu. without IRIG-B, events are tagged to the nearest
2. Press the right arrow button until SETUP second, and rely on the accuracy of the internal real
UNIT appears on the top line of the display. time clock. The relay can accept a modulated IRIG-B
signal via the rear panel BNC connector, or a
3. Press ENTER to access the SETUP demodulated TTL level signal via extra pins on the
UNIT menu and begin the data input.
rear panel COM2 RS-232 interface connector.

3–3
M-3425 Instruction Book

COM 1
RELAY BRKR TARGET
OK CLOSED TARGET PS 1 RESET
TARGETS
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.
TIME OSC. DIAG PS 2
SYNC TRIG M-3425

q
M-3425
q
q
GENERATOR PROTECTION
OUTPUTS

q
OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7
BECKWITH CO. INC. EXIT ENTER
ELECTRIC OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8

Made in U.S.A.

}
}
M-3931 M-3925
Human-Machine Interface Target Module
Module –Optional–
–Optional–

Figure 3-1 M-3425 Front Panel

Self-Tests

POWER ON SELFTESTS
XXXXXXXX TARGET
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.
01-Jan-1998 01:05:20.000
53rd St. Substation

LED Test TARGET

03 01
Default Message Screens
POWER ON SELFTESTS
PASS TARGET
27 #1 Phase Undervoltage
Model Number

Beckwith Electric Co.

M-3425
Trip Target Screens

Software Version

Beckwith Electric Co.

D - 0070V01.02.03 1269

Serial Number
ENTER ACCESS CODE ACCESS DENIED!
5-minute
Beckwith Electric Co. 0
access
SERIAL NUMBER 137 lockout

System Date and Time LEVEL 1 ACCESS GRANTED!

Beckwith Electric Co.

01-Jan-1998 15:24:32
Access Screens (optional)
User Logo

Beckwith Electric Co.

53rd St. Substation

Power-On Self-Test VOLTAGE RELAY

and Status Screens VOLT curr freq v/hz ➞ pwr lof fuse...

Power-On
27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
PHASE_UNDER ➞➞ nutrl_under phase_over...

27 #1 PICKUP
108 Volts
Main Menu Flow
Local Mode

Figure 3-2 Screen Message Menu Flow

3–4
 VOLTAGE RELAY CURRENT RELAY FREQUENCY RELAY VOLTS PER HERTZ RELAY POWER RELAY
VOLT curr freq v/hz volt CURR freq v/hz volt curr FREQ v/hz volt curr freq V/HZ PWR lof fuse dist

• 27 Phase Undervoltage • 46 Neg Seq Overcurrent • 81 Frequency • 24 Def Time Volts/Hertz • 32 Directional Power
• 27TN Neutral Undervoltage • 50 Inst Overcurrent • 81R Rate of Change of Freq • 24 Inv Time Volts/Hertz
• 59 Phase Overvoltage • 50/27 Inadvertent Energizing
• 59N Neutral Overvoltage
• 50BF Breaker Failure
• 50DT Def Time Overcurrent
• 50N Inst Overcurrent
• 51N Inv Time Overcurrent
• 51T Stator Therm. Prot.
• 51V Inv Time Overcurrent
• 87 Differential Overcurrent
• 87GD Gnd Differential Overcurrent

LOSS OF FIELD RELAY V.T. FUSE LOSS RELAY PHASE DISTANCE RELAY FIELD GROUND RELAY STATOR GROUND RELAY
LOF
pwrdist
LOF fuse
brkfail
dist
fuse pwr lof FUSE dist pwr lof fuse DIST FIELD stator ext field STATOR ext

• 40 Loss of Field • 60FL V.T. Fuse Loss • 21 Phase Distance • 64F Field Ground • 64S Stator Ground
• 78 Out-of-Step • 64B Brush Lift-Off

Figure 3-3
EXTERNAL RELAY CONFIGURE RELAY SETUP SYSTEM STATUS
rotor stator EXT CONFIG sys stat config SYS stat config sys STAT
• External • Voltage Relay • NominalVoltage
• Nominal Current • Voltage Status
• Current Relay • Current Status
• Frequency Relay • VT Configuration
• Delta-Y Transform • Frequency Status
• Volts per Hertz Relay • Volts per Hertz Status
• Power Relay • Phase Rotation
• 59/27 Magnitude Select • Power Status
• Loss of Field Relay • Impedance Status
• V.T. Fuse Loss Relay • 50DT Split-Phase Operate
• Pulse Relay • In/Out Status
• Phase Distance Relay • Timer Status
• Field Ground Relay • Relay Seal-In Time
• Active Input State • Counters
• Stator Ground Relay • Time of Last Power Up
• External Relay • V.T. Phase Ratio

Main Menu Flow

• V.T. Neutral Ratio • Error Codes
• C.T. Phase Ratio • Checksums
• C.T. Neutral Ratio

VIEW TARGET HISTORY OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER COMMUNICATION SETUP UNIT EXIT LOCAL MODE
TARGETS osc_rec comm targets OSC_REC comm targets osc_rec COMM SETUP exit setup EXIT

• View Target History • View Record Status • COM 1 Setup • Software Version
• Clear Target History • Clear Records • COM 2 Setup • Serial Number
• Recorder Setup • COM 3 Setup • Alter Access Codes
• Communication Address • User Control Number

Q NOTE: Depending on which functions are purchased, some menus may not appear.
• Comm Access Code • User Logo Line 1
• User Logo Line 2
• Clear Output Counters
• Clear Alarm Counter
• Date & Time
• Clear Error Codes
• Diagnostic Mode

3–5
Operation – 3
M-3425 Instruction Book

Clear Output, Alarm Counters, and Error Codes: Each of the purchased functions within the relay
These codes are self-explanatory. Also available may be individually enabled or disabled. In addition,
under this submenu is the ability to read the software many functions have more than one element which
version and serial number as well as enter the may also be enabled or disabled. Unused functions
Diagnostic Mode. Note that while the relay is in and elements should be disabled to avoid nuisance
Diagnostic Mode, all protective functions are tripping and speed up HMI response time. After
inoperative. enabling a function/element, the user is presented
with two additional screens for selection of input
Setup System Data blocking and output contact designations. Any
To input the data, access the SETUP SYSTEM combination of the six status inputs or the internally
menu as follows: generated V.T. fuse loss logic can be selected to
1. Press ENTER to bring up the main dynamically block the enabled function. “OR” logic
menu. is used if more than one input is selected. Outputs
are designated in a similar manner. Outputs 1–6
2. Press the right arrow button until SETUP are form “a” contacts (normally open) and outputs
SYSTEM appears on the top line of the 7 and 8 are form “c” contacts (center tapped “a”
display. and “b” contacts). Output contacts 1–4 contain
3. Press ENTER to access the SETUP special circuitry for high-speed operation and pick
SYSTEM menu and begin the data up about 4 μsec faster than other contacts.
input.
See Section 2.1, Configuration, for more
System setup data is required for proper operation information.
of the relay. Information needed to complete this
section includes: Nominal Voltage, Nominal Setpoints and Time Settings
Current, VT Configuration, and other system- To input the data, access these menus as follows:
related information. See Chapter 2, Configuration,
Relay System Setup for a more detailed description 1. Press ENTER to bring up the main menu.
of the settings required. 2. Press the right arrow button until
VOLTAGE RELAY, the first of the
Configure Relay Data setpoint and time setting menus,
appears on the top line of the display.
To input the data, access the CONFIGURE RELAY
menu as follows: Q NOTE: Some menus are dynamic, and do not
1. Press ENTER to bring up the main appear if the function is not purchased
menu. or is unavailable.
2. Press the right arrow button until
CONFIGURE RELAY appears on the 3. Press ENTER to begin the data input for
top line of the display. this menu, or continue pressing the right
arrow button until the desired setpoint and
3. Press ENTER to access the time setting menu appears, and then press
CONFIGURE RELAY menu and begin ENTER to begin the data input.
the data input.
The general information required to complete the
The general information required to complete the input data in this section includes individual relay
input data in this section includes: function:
• enable/disable • pickup settings (converted to relay
quantities)
• output choices (OUT1–OUT8)
• time delay settings
• input blocking choices (IN1–IN6), plus
fuse loss blocking • frequency settings
• time dials
• power level settings (in percent rated)
• impedance diameter in relay ohms for
distance and offset settings

3–6
 Operation – 3

Settings should be programmed based on system • Trigger Inputs and Outputs: The recorder
analysis as described in Chapter 2, Application. A can be triggered remotely through serial
complete description of the individual function as communications via IPScom, or
well as guidelines for settings are explained therein. automatically via programmed status inputs
(IN1–6) or outputs (OUT1–8).
Oscillograph Recorder Data • Post-Trigger Delay: A post-trigger delay
To input the data, access the OSCILLOGRAPH of 5% to 95% must be specified. After
RECORDER menu as follows: triggering, the recorder will continue to
store data for the programmed portion of
1. Press ENTER to bring up the main the total record before rearming for the
menu.
next record. For example, a setting of
2. Press the right arrow button until 80% will result in a record with 20%
OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER pretrigger data, and 80% post-trigger
appears on the top line of the display. data.
3. Press ENTER to access the
OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER menu Communications Data
and begin the data input. To input the data, access the COMMUNICATION
menu as follows:
The Oscillograph Recorder provides
comprehensive data recording (voltage, current, 1. Press ENTER to bring up the main
menu.
and status input/output signals) for all monitored
waveforms (at 16 samples per cycle). Oscillograph 2. Press the right arrow button until
data can be downloaded via the communications COMMUNICATION appears on the top
ports to any IBM compatible personal computer line of the display.
running the M-3820A IPScom® Communications 3. Press ENTER to access the
software package. Once downloaded, the COMMUNICATION menu and begin the
waveform data can be examined and printed using data input.
the optional M-3801C IPSplot® Oscillograph Data
Analysis Software package. The general information required to complete the
▲ CAUTION: Oscillograph records are not retained input data of this section includes:
if power to the relay is interrupted. • Baud rate for COM1 and COM2
communication ports. The COM3 port
The general information required to complete the does not have a separate baud rate
input data of this section includes: setting but uses the setting of COM2 (or
• Recorder Partitions: When untriggered, COM1: see Section 5.4 Circuit Board
the recorder continuously records Switches & Jumpers).
waveform data, keeping the data in a • Communications address is used to
buffer memory. The recorder's memory access multiple relays via a multidrop
may be partitioned into 1 record of 170 communication line.
cycles, 2 records of 112 cycles, 3 records
of 84 cycles, or 4 records of 68 cycles • Communications access code is used
each. When triggered, the time stamp is for communication system security
recorded, and the recorder continues (entering an access code of 9999
recording for a user-defined period. The disables the communication security).
snapshot of the waveform is stored in • Communication protocol and dead sync
memory for later retrieval using IPScom time for COM2 and COM3.
Communications Software. The OSC • Parity for COM2 or COM3 if MODBUS
TRIG LED on the front panel will indicate protocol used.
a recorder operation (data is available
for downloading).
Detailed information concerning setup and operation
of the communication ports is covered in Chapter 4,
Remote Operation.

3–7
M-3425 Instruction Book

3.3 Status/Metering 3.4 Target History

Monitor Status/Metering The M-3425 Generator Protection Relay has the

Access the STATUS menu as follows: ability to store the last twenty-four target conditions
in a nonvolatile manner. A target is triggered
1. Press ENTER to bring up the main menu. whenever an output is operated (OUT1–OUT8). A
2. Press the right arrow button until STATUS second function attempting to operate an output
appears on the top line of the display. (which is already operated) will not trigger a new
target, since no new output has been operated or
3. Press ENTER to access the STATUS closed. If the second function operation closes a
menu and begin the monitoring. different, unoperated output, a new target will be
triggered. A target includes:
Each category listed below is a menu item. Pressing • an indication which function(s) have
the ENTER button moves down within that menu, operated, and timers expired (operated),
allowing you to monitor values within that menu • status information which indicates any
category. To exit a specific category and continue function that is timing (picked up),
to the next menu category, press the EXIT button.
• individual phase element information at
Some menus are dynamic and do not appear if the time of the trigger, if the operating
certain functions are not purchased, or are function was a three phase function,
unavailable. • phase currents at the time of operation
The menu categories for monitored values are: • neutral current at the time of operation,
• Voltage Status: phase voltages, neutral • input and output status, and
voltage, positive sequence voltage, • a date/time tag.
negative sequence voltage, zero
sequence voltage, 3rd harmonic neutral
voltage, field ground measurement circuit, When a target is triggered, the front panel TARGET
stator low frequency injection voltage LED will light, indicating a recent event. If the
optional M-3925 Target Module is present, the
• Current Status: phase currents (A–B–
corresponding function LED will be lit. If the optional
C/a-b-c), differential current, neutral
M-3931 HMI module is available, a series of screens
current, ground differential current,
will be presented, describing the most recent
positive sequence current, negative
operation. This information is also available remotely
sequence current, zero sequence current, by using the IPScom® communication package.
stator low frequency injection current
• Frequency Status: frequency, rate of
change of frequency
• Volts/Hz Status: volts per hertz
• Power Status: real power, reactive
power, apparent power, power factor
• Impedance Status: impedance (Zab,
Zbc, Zca), positive sequence impedance,
field ground resistance
• IN/OUT Status: Status of input and output
contacts
• Timer: 51V Delay Timer, 51N Delay
Timer, 46IT Delay Timer, 51T Delay Timer,
24IT Delay Timer
• Counters: output, alarm counter
• Time of Last Powerup
• Error Codes
• Checksums: setpoints, calibration, ROM

3–8
 Operation – 3

VIEW TARGET HISTORY This screen gives access to the target history, and also allows
TRGT clear the user to clear the target history record from memory.

VIEW TARGET HISTORY Using up and down buttons, user may select which particular tar-
1 Target number get to view from the last 24 recorded triggers.

TARGET 1 This screen gives the date and time tag of the selected target.
01-JAN-2001 12:27:35.125

TARGET 1 This screen displays operated outputs.

08 05 01
This screen displays operated inputs at time of trip.
TARGET 1
I3 I1

TARGET 1 The following screens display the timed out or “operate” functions.
-OPERATE TARGETS-

TARGET 1 This screen displays the specific function which timed out and
27#1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE triggered the target.

TARGET 1 This gives the phase information for the displayed function at time
PHASE A=X B= C= out.

The following screens display the timing on “picked up” functions

TARGET 1
when the target was recorded.
-PICKUP TARGETS-

TARGET 1
27#1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE

TARGET 1 This gives the phase pickup information for the specific function.
PHASE A=X B=X C=X

TARGET 1
-CURRENT STATUS-

TARGET 1 This screen shows the phase current at the time the target operated.
a=0.02 b=0.03 c=0.04

TARGET 1 This screen displays the neutral current at the time the target operated.
N=0.50 AMPS

3–9
M-3425 Instruction Book

This Page Left Intentionally Blank

3–10
 Remote Operation – 4

4 Remote Operation 1

4.1 Remote Operation ................................................................................ 4–1

4.2 Installation and Setup (IPScom®) ......................................................... 4–4
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................. 4–5
4.4 Checkout Status/Metering (Windows) ................................................ 4–16
4.5 Cautions ............................................................................................. 4–19
4.6 Keyboard Shortcuts ........................................................................... 4–20
4.7 IPSutil™ Communications Software Package M-3890 ........................ 4–21

This chapter is designed for the person or group The communication protocols implement serial, byte
3
responsible for the remote operation and setting of oriented, asynchronous communication and can be
the relay using the M-3820A IPScom used to fulfill the following communications functions:
Communications Software package or other means.
• Real-time monitoring of line status
• Interrogation and modification of setpoints
4.1 Remote Operation • Downloading of recorded oscillograph data

The M-3425 Generator Protection Relay provides

three serial communication ports. Two serial
• Reconfiguration of all relay functions
A
interface ports, COM1 and COM2, are standard 9- Direct Connection
pin, RS-232, DTE-configured ports. The front-panel In order for IPScom to communicate with the relay
port, COM1, can be used to locally set and interrogate via direct serial connection, a serial “null modem”
the relay via a temporary connection to a PC or cable is required, with a 9-pin connector (DB9P) for
laptop computer. The second RS-232 port, COM2, the system, and an applicable connector for the
is provided at the rear of the unit. Either port COM2 computer (usually DB9S or DB25S). Pin-outs for a
or COM3 may be used to remotely set and
interrogate the relay via a modem or other direct
serial connection. Equipment such as RTU’s, data
null modem adapter are provided in Appendix B,
Communications. B
concentrators, modems, or computers can be An optional 10 foot null modem cable (M-0423) is
interfaced for direct, on-line, real time data available from the factory, for direct connection
acquisition and control. Generally, all data available between a PC and the relay’s front panel COM port,
to the operator through the front panel of the relay or the rear COM2 port.
with the optional M-3931 HMI module is accessible When fabricating communication cables, every effort
remotely through the BECO 2200 or MODBUS data

C
should be made to keep cabling as short as possible.
exchange protocol. These protocol documents and Low capacitance cable is recommended. The RS-232
the database specific protocol document are standard specifies a maximum cable length of 50
available from the factory or our website at feet for RS-232 connections. If over 50 feet of cable
www.beckwithelectric.com. length is required, other technologies should be
investigated.

4–1
 M-3425 Instruction Book

Multiple Systems Setup Serial Multidrop Network Setup

The individual addressing capability of IPScom® Individual remote addressing also allows for
and the relay allows multiple systems to share a communications through a serial multidrop network.

1
direct or modem connection when connected via a Up to 32 relays can be connected using the same
communications-line splitter (see Figure 4-1, below). 2-wire RS-485 communications line.
One such device enables 2 to 6 units to share one
communications line. Appendix B, Figure B-2 illustrates a setup of RS-232
Fiber Optic network, and Figure B-3 illustrates a
2-wire RS-485 network.
Other communication topologies are possible using
the M-3425 Generator Protection Relay. An
Application Note, “Serial Communication with
Beckwith Electric’s Integrated Protection System
Relays” is available from the factory.

Null Modem Cable for

Direct RS-232 Connection

3
IBM-Compatible PC

Master Port

Communications-Line Splitter

A
Address 6

Address 5

Address 4
Address 1
Address 3 Up to six controls
Integrated Protection can be used with a
System Address 2 communications-line splitter.

B Figure 4-1 Multiple Systems Addressing Using Communications-Line Splitter

4–2
 Remote Operation – 4

Setting Up the M-3425 Generator Protection Individual relay communication addresses should
Relay for Communication be between 1 and 200. The dead sync time, while
The initial setup of the relay for communication not critical for most communication networks, should
be programmed to match the communications

1
must be completed by the optional M-3931 HMI
Module or via direct serial connection. channels baud rate (see Table 4-1, below).

For units shipped without the optional HMI Module,

the communication parameters may be altered by Baud Rate De ad-Sync Time
first establishing communication using the default
parameters and the IPSutil™ program. 9600 4 ms

IPSutil is an auxiliary program shipped on the same 4800 8 ms

disk with the IPScom ® program. It is used 2400 16 ms
exclusively for altering communication and setup
parameters on units shipped without the M-3931 1200 32 ms
HMI Module. 600 64 ms
The following communication parameters must be 300 128 ms
set for proper operation:
Table 4-1 Dead-Sync Time
COM1 Baud Rate: Standard baud rates from 300 to
9600 are available.
Installing the Modems

3
COM2 Baud Rate: Standard baud rates from 300 to Using IPScom to interrogate, set or monitor the
9600 are available. COM2 and COM3 share the relay via a modem requires both a remote modem
same baud rate (see Table 5.1, Jumpers). connected at the relay location and a local modem
connected to the computer with IPScom installed.
COM2 Dead Sync Time: This delay establishes
the line idle time to re-sync packet communication. In order to use IPScom to communicate with the
Dead sync time should be programmed based on relay via a modem, the following must be provided
the channel’s baud rate. with the unit:
COM2 Protocol: BECO 2200 or MODBUS protocol • An external modem (300 baud or higher),
is supported on COM2.
COM2 Parity: None, odd or even parity is available
•
capable of understanding standard AT
commands.
Serial modem cable with 9-pin connector
A
if MODBUS protocol is selected.
for the unit and the applicable connector
COM3 Dead Sync Time: This delay establishes for the modem.
the line idle time to re-sync packet communication.
Dead sync time should be programmed based on Q NOTE: Any compatible modem may be used;
the channel’s baud rate. however, the unit only communicates at

B
COM3 Protocol: BECO 2200 or MODBUS protocol 300 to 9600 baud.
is supported on COM3.
Similarly, the computer running IPScom must also
COM3 Parity: None, odd or even parity is available
have access to an internal or external compatible
if MODBUS protocol is selected.
modem.
Communications Address: For multidrop networks,
each device must have a unique address.
Communication Access Code: If additional link
security is desired, a communication access code
can be programmed. Like the user access codes, if
the communication access code is set to 9999
C
(default), communication security is disabled.

4–3
 M-3425 Instruction Book

The local modem can be initialized, using IPScom, b. Connect the modem to the telephone
by connecting the modem to the computer, and line and power up.
selecting the COMM menu in IPScom. Select
The modem attached to the unit must have the
MODEM, enter the required information, and finally

1
following AT command configuration:
select INITIALIZE from the expanded
Communications dialog box. The following steps
outline the initialized modem setup procedure. E0 No Echo
Q1 Don’t return result code
1. Connecting the modem to the computer:
&D3 On to OFF DTR, hang-up and reset
a. If the computer has an external
modem, use a standard straight- &S0 DSR always on
through RS-232 modem cable to
&C1 DCD ON when detected
connect the computer and modem
(M-3933). If the computer has an S0=2 Answer on second ring
internal modem, refer to the modem’s
instruction book to determine which The following commands may also be required at
communications port should be the modem:
selected.
b. The modem must be attached to (if &Q6 Constant DTE to DCE
external) or assigned to (if internal)
the same serial port as assigned in N0 Answer only at specified speed

3 IPScom®. While IPScom can use

any of the four serial ports (COM1
through COM4), most computers
W
\Q3
Disable serial data rate adjust
Bi-directional RTS/CTS relay
support only COM1 and COM2. &B1 Fixed serial port rate
c. Connect the modem to the telephone
line and power up. S37 Desired line connection speed

There are some variations in the AT commands

2. Connecting the Modem to the Relay: supported by modem manufacturers. Refer to the

A Setup of the modem attached to the

relay may be slightly complicated. It
involves programming the parameters
hardware user documentation for a list of supported
AT commands and direction on issuing these
commands.
(via the AT command set), and storing
this profile in the modem’s nonvolatile
memory. 4.2 Installation and Setup
After programming, the modem will power
(IPScom)
up in the proper state for communicating
with the relay. Programming may be IPScom runs with the Microsoft Windows® 95

B accomplished by using “Hyperterminal”

or other terminal software. Refer to your
modem manual for further information.
operating system or later. IPScom only supports
communication via the BECO 2200 protocol.
IPScom is available via the following (IBM
Q NOTE: The relay does not issue or understand PC-compatible format):
any modem commands. It will not adjust
the baud rate and should be considered • two 3.5" double-sided, high-density (DS/
a “dumb” peripheral. It communicates HD 1.44 Mb) disk
with 1 start, 8 data, and 1 stop bit.
• available for download from our website at

C a. Connect the unit to an external modem

by attaching a standard RS-232 modem
www.beckwithelectric.com

cable to the appropriate serial

communications port on both the unit
and the modem.

4–4
 Remote Operation – 4

The M-3820A IPScom Communications Software Installing IPSutil™

package is not copy-protected and can be copied to IPSutil is utility software used to program system-
a hard disk. For more information on your specific level parameters for units shipped without the M-3931
rights and responsibilities, see the licensing

1
HMI Module. The IPSutil.exe file is automatically
agreement enclosed with your software or contact installed in the Becoware folder, along with the
Beckwith Electric. IPScom files, and does not require separate
installation.
Hardware Requirements
IPScom ® will run on any IBM PC-compatible
computer that provides at least the following: 4.3 Operation

• 8 Mb of RAM Activating Communications

• Microsoft Windows 95 or later After the relay has been set up, the modems
• one 3.5" double-sided, high-density (DS/ initialized, and IPScom installed, communication is
HD 1.44 Mb) disk drive activated as follows:
• one serial (RS-232) communication port
• VGA monitor 1. Choose the IPScom icon from the
• Mouse or pointing device Becoware folder.
2. The IPScom splash screen is displayed
Recommended, but not required, are the following: briefly, providing the software version

3
number and copyright information. This
• Windows-compatible printer information is also available by choosing
the About... command from the Help menu.
Installation 3. Choose the COMM menu selection.
Before installing the IPScom program, make a copy Complete the appropriate information on
of the software disks for archival purposes. the window for the relay to be addressed.
a. If communication is through a
modem, choose the Modem
command button to expand the
communications dialog box. Choose
the desired relay location and choose
Dial button. This action establishes
A
contact and automatically opens
Figure 4-2 IPScom Program Icon communication to the relay.
b. If computer is connected through
IPScom can be run from a hard disk. An installation the front port, choose the Open
utility (setup.exe) has been provided to make the COM button. This action establishes
process easier.

B
communications.

Installing IPScom 4. Enter any valid IPScom command(s) as

desired.
1. Insert software disk 1 in your drive.
5. To end communication when
2. Select Run from the Start Menu. communicating by modem, choose the
3. In the Run dialog box, specify the file to Hang Up command button from the
be installed by typing either A:\Setup or expanded Communication dialog box. To
B:\Setup, depending on the drive in which close the communication channel when
connected locally, choose the Close

C
the software diskette is inserted.
COM command button.
4. The installation utility establishes a
program folder (Becoware) and
subdirectory (IPScom). After installation,
the IPScom program item icon (see Figure
4-2) is located in Becoware. The default
location for the application files is on
drive C:, in the new subdirectory “IPScom”
(C:\Becoware\Ipscom).

4–5
 M-3425 Instruction Book

IPScom
File Comm Relay Window Help
A:1 M-3425

1 Window User Logo Lines Relay Type

File Cascade / Unit Identifier
Unit Address
New Tile
Open... Arrange Icons
Close Close All
Save
Save As...
Print
Help
Printer Setup
Exit Alt+F4 Contents
Using Help
About...
Profile Info
Comm

Choosing the Comm menu sends you

3
directly to the Communication dialog box.

Setup System
Relay Setpoints
Set Date/Time
Setup u
Primary Status
Monitor u
Secondary Status

A
Targets u Display Secondary Status (II)
Oscillograph u Reset LED Phase Distance
Profile Setup Clear History Loss of Field
Write File To Relay Retrieve Out of Step
Read Data From Relay Trigger Phasor Diagram
Clear Demand
Function Status

B Figure 4-3 IPScom® Menu Selections

Q NOTE: Greyed-out menu items are for future release, and are not currently available.

4–6
 Remote Operation – 4

Overview Protective System Unit Type Firmware Version

When IPScom® is run, a menu and status bar is
M-3425 D-0070XXX.XX.XX
displayed, as shown in Figure 4-3. This section

1
describes each IPScom menu selection and explains M-3425A D-0114XXX.XX.XX
each IPScom command in the same order as they M-3425A (SOE) D-0150XXX.XX.XX
are displayed in the software program. For detailed
information on each dialog box field (function), refer M-3425A Expanded I/O D-0150XXX.XX.XX
to Chapter 2, Application.
Table 4-2 Protective System Firmware
When starting IPScom, the initial menu choices are Association
the File menu or the Comm menu. The choice
specifies whether the operator desires to write to a
data file or to communicate directly with the relay. System Type X

Unit Type: M-3425

File Menu OK
Nominal Frequency: 50 Hz 60 Hz

File C.T. Secondary Rating: 1A 5A Cancel

New Phase Rotation: ABC ACB

Open...
Close Figure 4-4 System Type Dialog Box
Save

3
Path: File menu / New command
Save As...
Print COMMAND BUTTONS
Printer Setup OK Saves the currently displayed
Exit Alt+F4 information.
Cancel Returns you to the IPScom main window;
The File menu enables the user to create a new any changes to the displayed
data file, open a previously created data file, close, information are lost.
print, and save the file. The IPScom program can
also be exited through the File menu.
Since IPScom can be used with several Beckwith
The Save and Save As... commands allow re-
saving a file or renaming a file, respectively. The
Open command allows opening a previously created
A
protection systems in addition to the M-3425 data file. With an opened data file, use the Relay...
Generator Protection Relay, the format and contents Setup... menu items to access the setpoint windows.
of a file must be established depending on which
protective system is being addressed. When not If communication can be established with a relay, it
connected to one of the protection systems, using is always safer to use the Read Data From Relay
the New command, a new file is established with the command to update the PC’s data file with the relay

B
System Type dialog box (see Figure 4-4). Choices data. This file now contains the proper system type
for Unit Type in teh System Type Screen include M- information, eliminating the need to set the
3425, M-3425A, M-3425A(SOE) and M-3425A information manually.
Expanded I/O. The selected Unit Type ensures that The Print and Printer Setup commands allow user
the “New” file is consistant with the protective system to select printer options and print out all setpoint
firmware version (Table 4-2). Choosing the OK data from the data file or directly from the relay, if a
command button allows the new data file to be relay is communicating with the PC.
opened. Selecting Save or Save As commands
alows the file to be names and saved. The Exit command quits the IPScom program.

Q NOTE: By choosing the NEW command, unit

and setpoint configuration values are
C
based on factory settings specified for
the profiled protection system.

4–7
 M-3425 Instruction Book

Comm Menu string, the AT &F may be selected to initialize.

Following initialization, select an entry from the
File Comm Relay Window Help modem list and press the Dial button to dial out.

1
The Communication dialog box (see Figure 4-5) If the modem was not used to establish
allows setup of the IPScom communication data to communication (direct connection), press the Open
coordinate with the relay and by choosing the COM button to start. If the relay has a default
Modem button, to establish contact for remote communication access code of 9999, a message
locations. When communicating by way of a fiber window will appear showing access level #3 was
optic loop network, echo cancelling is available by granted. Otherwise, another dialog box will appear
checking the Echo Cancel box. This command to prompt the user to enter the access code in order
masks the sender’s returned echo. to establish the communication. Close COM
If communication is established through the modem, discontinues communication.
the Initialize button should be pressed. If
communication cannot be established with the default

A
Figure 4-5 Communication Dialog Box

Path: Comm menu Edit Displays the Add/Edit dialog box,

allowing you to review and change the
COMMAND BUTTONS user lines (unit identifier), phone number,

B
and communication address of a
Open COM Initiates contact with the protective
selected entry.
system, either by direct serial or modem
communication. Delete Deletes a selected entry.
Close COM Breaks communication with the Initialize Allows you to send special setup or other
protective system, for both direct serial AT commands directly to the modem.
or modem communication.
Dial Dials the entry selected from the
Modem Displays the expanded Communication directory.
dialog box.
Hang Up Ends modem communication, allowing

C Cancel Returns you to the IPScom main window;

any changes to the displayed
information are lost.
Bring Up
Terminal
you to dial again.
Built-in terminal window allows
interactive communication between
Add Displays the Add/Edit dialog box, Window modem and relay
allowing you to type a protective system’s After Dialing
unit identifier, phone number, and
communication address.

4–8
 Remote Operation – 4

Relay Menu

1
The Setup submenu provides three commands:
Setup System, Setpoints, and Set Date/Time.
The Setup System command displays the Setup
The Relay menu provides access to the windows System dialog box (Figure 4-6) allowing the input of
used to set, monitor, or interrogate the relay. Four the pertinent information regarding the system on
submenus are provided: Setup, Monitor, Targets which the protective relay is applied (see Section
and Oscillograph as well as two commands, Write 2.1, Configuration, Relay System Setup).
File to Relay and Read Data From Relay.

B
Figure 4-6 Setup System Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setup System command

COMMAND BUTTONS
Save When connected to a protection system, sends the currently displayed information to the unit.
Otherwise, saves the currently displayed information. C
Cancel Returns you to the IPScom® main window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.
Q NOTE: Checking the inputs for the Active Input Open parameter designates the “operated” state established by
an opening rather than a closing external contact.

4–9
 M-3425 Instruction Book

The Setpoints command displays the Relay The Relay Setpoints dialog box gives access to two
Setpoints dialog box (see Figure 4-7) from which additional dialog boxes: Display All and Configure.
the individual relay function dialog boxes can be
accessed. Choosing a Relay function button will Choosing the Display All command button displays

1 display the corresponding function dialog box (see

Figure 4-8 for example).
the All Setpoints Table dialog box (see Fig. 4-9).
This dialog contains a list of settings for each relay
within a single window to allow scrolling through all
relay setpoint configuration values. Choosing the
Configure command button displays the Configure
dialog box (see Fig. 4-10), which contains a chart
of programmed input and output contacts, in order
to allow scrolling through all relay output and blocking
input configurations. Both dialog boxes (All Setpoint
Table and Configure), feature hotspots which allows
the user to jump from a scrolling dialog box to an
individual relay function dialog box and return to the
scrolling dialog box again. All available parameters
can be reviewed or changed when jumping to a
relay configuration dialog box from either scrolling
dialog box.

3
Figure 4-7 Relay Setpoints Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window

COMMAND BUTTONS
Display All Opens the All Setpoints Table dialog

A Configure
box.
Opens the Configure dialog box.
Figure 4-8 Negative Sequence Overcurrent
Setpoint Dialog Box
Exit Saves the currently displayed
information and returns you to the Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/
IPScom® main window. 46 command button OR 46 jump hotspot within All Setpoints
Table or Configure dialog box

COMMAND BUTTONS

B Save When connected to a protection system,

sends the currently displayed
information to the unit. Otherwise, saves
the currently displayed information and
returns you to the Relay Setpoints, All
Setpoints Table, or Configure dialog
box.
Cancel Returns you to the Relay Setpoints, All
Setpoints Table, or Configure dialog

C box; any changes to the displayed

information are lost.

4–10
 Remote Operation – 4

Figure 4-9 All Setpoints Table Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ Display All command button A
JUMP HOTSPOTS
This window provides you with jump hotspots, identified by the hand icon, that take you to each relay
dialog box and the Setup Relay dialog box. Exiting any of these dialog boxes will return you to the All
Setpoints Table dialog box.

CONTROL MENU
Close
Move
Returns you to the Relay Setpoints dialog box.
Allows you to reposition the dialog box.
B

4–11
 M-3425 Instruction Book

Figure 4-10 Configure Dialog Box

B Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ Configure command button

JUMP HOTSPOTS
This window provides you with jump hotspots, identified by the hand icon, that take you to each relay
dialog box. Exiting any of these dialog boxes will return you to the Configure dialog box.

CONTROL MENU

C Close
Move
Returns you to the Relay Setpoints dialog box.
Allows you to reposition the dialog box.

4–12
 Remote Operation – 4

The Set Date/Time command (see Figure 4-11) The Monitor submenu provides access for reviewing
allows the system date and time to be set, or the present status of the relay's measured and
system clock to be stopped. This dialog box also calculated values, other real-time parameters and
displays an LED mimic to identify when the Time conditions as well as examining real-time and
Sync is in use (preventing date/time from being
changed by user).
historical demand metering information (see Section
4.4 Checkout Status/Metering). A cascading menu
appears, providing several command options as
1
shown below.

The Targets submenu provides three command

Figure 4-11 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box options: Display, Reset LED, and Clear History.
The Display command displays the Target Dialog.
This dialog box (see Figure 4-12) provides detailed
3
Path: Relay menu/ Setup submenu/ Set Date/Time
Command data on target events, including time, date, function
status, phase current values, and IN/OUT contact
There is a blue Time Sync LED mimic on this dialog
status at the time of trip. Individually recorded
box (the LED is displayed as different shading on a
events may be selected within the dialog box and
monochrome monitor). When this LED is blue, the
saved into a text file, or be printed out with optional
relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal and the
added comments. The Reset LED is similar to

A
Time field is grayed out, indicating that this field
pushing the Target Reset button on the relay’s front
can’t be changed. But the Date field can be changed
panel, resetting current target(s) displayed on the
(by editing and pressing Save).
relay. This command does not reset any target
When the LED is not blue, the relay is not time- history.
synchronized and therefore, both the Date and Time
fields can be changed.
The time field in the dialog box is not updated
continuously. The time at which the dialog box was
opened is the time that is displayed and remains as
such. This is true whether the relay is synchronized
with the IRIG-B signal or not.
B
COMMAND BUTTONS
Stop Clock This toggles between start/stop, the relay The Clear History command clears all stored target
clock. ‘Stop’ pauses, ‘Start’ resumes. data.

C
Cancel Returns you to the IPScom ® main
window. Any changes to the displayed
information is lost.

4–13
 M-3425 Instruction Book

Figure 4-12 Target Dialog Box

3 Path: Relay menu / Targets submenu / Display window

Time is displayed in milliseconds when the IRIG-B time synchronization is used. When the IRIG-B is not used, the millisecond
part of the time stamp reads 000.

COMMAND BUTTONS
Comment Opens comment dialog box for annotation.
Print Prints out selected target information, with comment.

A
Save Saves selected target information, with comment, as a text file.
Close Exits the currently displayed dialog box.

4–14
 Remote Operation – 4

The Oscillograph submenu allows storing data on Currently in revision, the Help menu will enable the
selected parameters for review and plotting at a user to look up information about any IPScom
later time. The Setup command allows the user to menus or commands. Though displaying (greyed-out)
set the number of partitions and triggering Help commands, this menu item is currently
designations to be made. The Retrieve command
downloads and stores collected data to a file; Trigger
allows the manual triggering of the recorder; Clear
unavailable.
1
erases the existing records. Run the optional
M-3801D IPSplot® PLUS Oscillograph Analysis
Software program to view the downloaded
oscillograph files.
▲ CAUTION: Oscillograph records are not retained
if power to the relay is interrupted.
The About IPScom Dialog Box (see Figure 4-13)
Profile is currently unavailable, and will be greyed- displays IPScom version and development
out in display. information.

3
The Write File To Relay command is used to write
the data to the relay. The Read Data From Relay
command is used to retrieve the data from the relay
to the computer for display.

Figure 4-13 About IPScom Dialog Box

A
Path: Help menu / About... command

COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Exits the currently displayed dialog box.

B
The Profile Info will allow the user to view or make
Window Menu/Help Menu notations for the relay setpoint data files. This
command is currently unavailable, and will be
greyed-out in the display.

C
The Window menu enables the positioning and
arrangement of all IPScom® windows so that there
is better access to available functions. This feature
allows the display of several windows at the same
time. Clicking on an inactive window activates that
window.

4–15
 M-3425 Instruction Book

4.4 Checkout Status/Metering

3
Figure 4-14 Primary Status Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu/ Monitor submenu/ Primary Status window

These are calculated values based on the VT and CT inputs.

C
Figure 4-15 Secondary Status Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu/ Monitor submenu/ Secondary Status window

4–16
 Remote Operation – 4

Figure 4-16 Phase Distance Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Phase Distance window

Phase Distance window shows a graphic representation of phase distance settings.

CONTROL BUTTONS
Move up the scope window
Move down the scope window
Move the scope window to the right
Zoom In
3
Move the scope window to the left Zoom Out

B
Figure 4-17 Loss of Field Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Loss of Field window

Loss-of-Field window shows a graphic representation of loss-of-field settings, and also displays the positive sequence
impedance.

CONTROL BUTTONS
Move up the scope window Move the scope window to the right
C
Move down the scope window Zoom In

Move the scope window to the left Zoom Out

4–17
 M-3425 Instruction Book

Figure 4-18 Out-of-Step Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Out-of-Step window

CONTROL BUTTONS

3 Move up the scope window

Move down the scope window

Move the scope window to the right

Zoom In

Move the scope window to the left Zoom Out

Figure 4-19 Phasor Dialog Box

C Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Phasor Diagram window

CONTROL BUTTONS
p Voltage Toggle & display voltage channel information
p Currents (A) Toggle & display current channel information.
p Freeze Toggle & update information

4–18
 Remote Operation – 4

Figure 4-20 Function Status Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Function Status window

Function Status window shows the status of various functions, with “T” representing the function which has tripped, and “P”
representing the function which has picked up and is timing. 3
COMMAND BUTTONS
Close Exits the currently displayed dialog box.

4.5 Cautions
Time and Date Stamping
Time and date stamping of events is only as useful A
as the validity of the unit’s internal clock. Under the
System and IPScom® Compatibility Relay menu, the Set Date/TIme command allows
Every attempt has been made to maintain you to manually set the unit’s clock.
compatibility with previous software versions. In
some cases (most notably with older protection Echo Cancel
systems), compatibility cannot be maintained. If
there is any question about compatibility, contact The Echo Cancel check box, under the Comm
the factory. menu, should only be used when several relays are
connected via a fiber optic loop network. Otherwise,
echo cancel must not be selected or communication
B
System Priority will be prevented.
System conflicts will not occur, as local commands
initiated from the front panel receive priority Serial Port Connections
recognition. When the unit is in local mode,
If the serial port is connected to something other
communication via the serial ports is suspended.
IPScom displays an error message to indicate this than a modem, and an IPScom modem command

C
fact. is executed, the results are unpredictable. In some
cases, the computer may have to be reset.

Oscillograph Records
If power to the relay is interrupted Oscillograph
Records are NOT retained.

4–19
 M-3425 Instruction Book

4.6 Keyboard Shortcuts

1 SYSTEM KEYS
Keyboard Shortcuts

DIALOG BOX KEYS

These keys can be used within Microsoft Windows® These keys are useful when working in a dialog box.
and IPScom®. Alt-a character key
Alt-Tab To move to the option or group whose underlined letter
To switch between applications. or number matches the one you type.

Ctrl-Esc Arrow Keys

To open Task List dialog box. Opens Start Menu (Win To move highlighted selections within list boxes.
95/98). Alt-Down Arrow
Ctrl-Tab To open a list.
To switch between windows within an application. Spacebar
Arrow Keys To select an item or cancel a selection in a list. Also to
To select an application or group icon. select or clear a check box.

First Character of Name Enter

To select application or group icon. To carry out a command.
Esc or Alt-F4

3
Enter
To open selected group or run selected application. To close a dialog box without completing the command.

MENU KEYS

These keys enable you to select menus and choose

commands.
Alt or F10
To select or cancel selection of the Setup menu on the

A
menu bar.
Left Arrow, Right Arrow
To move between menus.
Up Arrow, Down Arrow
To move between commands.
A character key
To choose the menu or command. The underlined
character matches the one you type.
Enter

B To choose the selected menu name or command.

Esc
To cancel the selected menu name, or to close the
open menu.

Table 4-3 Microsoft Windows Keyboard Shortcuts

4–20
 Remote Operation – 4

4.7 IPSutil™ Communications

Software

Comm
IPSutility ( Relay M-3425 D-0044 V1.1.1 )
Relay Comm Clock Security Miscellaneous Help
1
Miscellaneous

Setup
Monitor Status
RelayComm
Calibration
Advanced

Comm Help

Connect About...
Exit Alt+F4

3
Clock

Security
A
Change Comm Access Code
Change User Access Code

Figure 4-21 Main Menu Flow

B
M-3890 IPSutil 8 WARNING: For convenience, Beckwith
®
The M-3890 IPSutil Communication software Electric distributes both the IPScom and
package provides communication with the Beckwith IPSutil programs on the same disk. The user
Integrated Protection System® (IPS) for setting up should be aware, however, that the IPSutil
the relays. Its main purpose is to aid in setting up program has the capability of overriding the
IPS relays that are ordered without the optional security parameters set in the relay. It is

C
front panel HMI interface. recommended that you remove the IPSutil
program from the IPScom disk and file it
separately in a safe place, to be used by
authorized people.

4–21
 M-3425 Instruction Book

Installation and Setup • Select the correct PC communication port

IPSutil™ runs with the Microsoft® Windows 95 where the null modem cable is connected
operating system or above. Hardware requirements for the relay.

1
are the same as those stated for IPScom®. • Select the baud rate of the relay. Factory
default is 9600 baud.
Installation • Select the access code resident in the
An installation utility has been provided as a part of relay. Factory default is 9999.
IPScom and IPSutil programs. After installation, • Click “Open com” button.
IPSutil can be run from the hard drive by choosing
IPSUTIL.EXE.
The following message window will appear showing
COM opened. Now, the title bar will display the
System Setup relay model and the software version.
Connect a null modem cable from COM1 of the
relay to the PC serial port. IPSutil supports COM1
port direct connection only. Modem connection is
not supported. IPSutil is not supported through
COM2 or COM3 ports of the relay.

Overview
IPSutil helps in setting up IPS relays which were

3 ordered without the optional front panel HMI interface. The Exit submenu allows you to quit IPSutil. If the
Units delivered without HMI’s are shipped with a set relay was connected, this submenu disconnects
of factory default settings for various parameters the relay. When the relay was connected, if you
that the end user may wish to change. While the have made any changes for some parameters (for
utility program is directed to users that do not have example, baud rate, phase rotation) the following
HMI, users of HMI-provided relays can also use message window appears.
IPSutil to set various parameters. When IPSutil is
started, a warning window appears:

A
Relay Comm Command

Figure 4-22 Warning Message

When Relay Comm command is selected, the
After you accept the warning, you can access the Relay Comm Port Settings dialog box appears (see

B IPSutil main menu. The following sections describe

each IPSutil menu items.
Figure 4-24). It allows you to set the relay
communication ports COM1 or COM2/COM3 baud
rate. For COM2/COM3, it allows you to set the
Comm Menu protocol and dead sync time. Additionally, for COM2
and COM3, if you select MODBUS protocol, the
dialog box allows you to enable the parity option.

Q NOTE: If COM1 baud rate is changed and the

C
relay is reset, the new baud rate must be
The Comm menu allows you to make connections used to communicate with COM1.
to the relay. This is the first command you must
use to access the unit. After you click the Connect
submenu item, the Communications dialog box
appears (See Figure 4-24).

4–22
 Remote Operation – 4

Clock Command Miscellaneous Menu

1
When the Clock command is selected, the “Set
Unit Date/Time” dialog box appears (See Figure
4-26). Date and Time can be changed and sent to
the relay. This dialog box allows you to start or stop
the clock in the relay.
The Miscellaneous menu allows you to set and
monitor some of the relay parameters.
Security Menu
The Setup command allows you to change the
users Logo information, test outputs, assign
communication address and user control number,
phase rotation, OK LED flash mode in the relay.
The Security Menu allows you to set the Note that the highest number used for the
communication access code and the level access communication address is 255 and the highest
codes for the relay. control number allowed is 9999 (See Figure 4-29).

The Change Comm Access Code allows you to The Monitor Status command allows you to monitor
assign new communication access code to the and clear the error code counters, monitor the check
relay. The range of the access code is 1 to 9999. sums, and to view inputs test status. Note that the

3
Note that the access code 9999 is a factory default powerloss counter cannot be cleared.
(See Figure 4-27). The Calibration command allows easy access to
Q NOTE: Setting the access code to 9999 disables the relay’s Autocalibration features (see also Section
security. 6.3, Autocalibration), including Auto Calibrate,
Nominal Frequency, Third Harmonic, and, if
purchased, the 64F Field Ground function. See
The Change User Access Code allows you to Figure 4-23, below.
assign three different levels of access code for the
relay functions accessibility. The range of the level The Advanced command is reserved for factory

A
access code is 1 to 9999 (See Figure 4-28). use only.

Calibration X

Select Calibration Procedures

Nominal Frequency Connect VA=VB=VC=VN=12.0 (+/- 0.01)

VAC at 50 Hz, 0 deg phase and
Third Harmonic Ia=Ib=Ic=IA=IB=IC=IN=5.00 (+/- 0.01) A at 0
deg phase. Press Calibrate when ready.

B
64F Field Ground
64S Stator Protection

Calibrate Cancel

Figure 4-23 Calibration Dialog Box

4–23
 M-3425 Instruction Book

Help Menu

1 Under Help, the About... submenu provides you

the information on the IPSUtil™ version numbers.

Box
Figure 4-26 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box

COMMAND BUTTONS
Figure 4-24 Communication Dialog
Stop Clock This toggles between start/stop the clock
of the relay. The ‘Stop’ stops the clock in
COMMAND BUTTONS the relay. The ‘Start’ resumes the clock
in the relay.
Open COM Initiates communication with the

3 protective system by direct serial

communication.
Save When connected to the protection
system, the date and time information
on the display is sent to the relay.
Close COM Discontinues communication with the
protective system. Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window.
Any changes to the displayed
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil™ main
information are lost.
window. Any changes to the displayed
information are lost. There is a blue Time Sync LED mimic on this dialog
box (the LED is displayed as different shading on a

A
monochrome monitor). When this LED is blue, the
relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal and the
Time field is grayed out, indicating that this field
can’t be changed. But the Date field can be changed
(by editing and pressing Save). When the LED is
not blue, the relay is not time-synchronized and
therefore, both the Date and Time fields can be
changed. The time field in the dialog box is not
updated continuously. The time at which the dialog

B
box was opened is the time that is displayed and
remains as such. This is true whether the relay is
Figure 4-25 Relay Comm Port Settings synchronized with the IRIG-B signal or not.

COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Sends the currently displayed
information to the relay.
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window.

C Any changes to the displayed

information are lost.

4–24
 Remote Operation – 4

Figure 4-27 Change Communication Access

Code Dialog Box

COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Sends the currently displayed
information to the relay.
Figure 4-29 Setup Dialog Box
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil™ main
window. Any changes to the displayed
information are lost.
OK
COMMAND BUTTONS
Sends the currently
information to the relay.
displayed 3
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window.
Any changes to the displayed
information are lost.

A
Figure 4-28 Change User Access Code
Dialog Box

COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Sends the currently displayed

B
information to the relay.
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window.
Any changes to the displayed
information are lost.

4–25
 M-3425 Instruction Book

3
This Page Left Intentionally Blank

4–26
 Installation – 5

5 Installation

5.1 General Information............................................................................... 5–1

5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions.......................................................... 5–1
5.3 Commissioning Checkout...................................................................... 5–8
5.4 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers................................................... 5–11

If during the commissioning of the M‑3425 Genera‑

5.1 General Information tor Protection Relay, additional tests are desired,
Chapter 6, Testing, may be consulted.
The person or group responsible for the installation
of the relay will find herein all mechanical informa‑ The operation of the relay, including the initial setup
tion required for physical installation, equipment procedure, is described in Chapter 3, Operation,
ratings, and all external connections in this chapter. for HMI front panel users and in Chapter 4, Remote
For reference, the Three‑Line Connection Diagram Operation, when using a personal computer. Sec‑
is repeated from Chapter 2, Application. Further, tion 3.1, Front Panel Controls, details the front panel
a commissioning checkout procedure is outlined controls. Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Set‑
using the HMI option to check the external CT and tings, details the HMI setup procedure. This includes
VT connections. Additional tests which may be details necessary for input of the communications
desirable at the time of installation are described in data, unit setup data, configure relays data, the
Chapter 6, Testing. individual setpoints and time settings for each func‑
tion, and oscillograph recorder setup information.
 NOTE: Prior to installation of the equipment, Section 3.3, Status/Metering, guides the operator
it is essential to review the contents of through the checkout status procedures, including
this manual to locate data which may be monitoring the status and viewing the target history.
of importance during installation proce‑
dures. The following is a quick review 5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimen-
of the contents in the chapters of this sions
manual.
Figures 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, and 5‑4 contain physical
It is suggested the terminal connections illustrated dimensions of the relay that may be required for
here be transferred to station one-line wiring and mounting the unit on a rack.
three-line connection diagrams, station panel draw‑
ings and station DC wiring schematics.

5–1
M‑3425 Instruction Book

17.68
[44.91]
17.50
[44.45]
ACTUAL

5.21
5.28
[13.23]
[13.41]
ACTUAL

RECOMMENDED CUTOUT WHEN RELAY IS

NOT USED AS STANDARD RACK MOUNT

17.50
[44.45]

10.20
[25.91]

19.00
[48.26]

18.31 0.35
[46.51] [0.89]

0.40 [1.02] X 0.27

[0.68] Slot (4X)

2.25
[5.72]

1.48
[3.76]

Standard 19" Horizontal Mount Chassis

NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.

Figure 5‑1  M-3425 Mounting Dimensions  –  Horizontal Chassis

5–2
 Installation – 5

5.65
[14.40]
6.19 5.59
[14.20] 0.03
[15.7]
Actual [0.076]
2.25 1.97
0.35 [5.72] [5.0] 2.25 1.67
[0.89] [5.72] [4.24]
0.28 [0.71]
Dia. (4X)

TARGETS

19.00
[48.26]

OUTPUTS
OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7

18.30
OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8

[46.51]
17.5
[44.45]
ACTUAL

17.68
[44.91]
EXIT ENTER

TARGET
RESET

PS 2 PS 1

TARGET DIAG

BRKR OSC.
CLOSED TRIG

RELAY TIME
OK SYNC

COM 1

Recommended cutout when relay is not used as

standard rack mount and is panel cut out mounted.
17.50
[44.45]

10.20
[25.91]

19.00
[48.26]

NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.

Figure 5‑2  M-3425 Mounting Dimensions  –  Vertical Chassis

5–3
M‑3425 Instruction Book

.35
[0.89] 1.97 2.25
[5.0] [5.71]

.261 [0.66]
Diameter
4 Holes

8.84
[22.45]

Recommended
Panel Cutout
Dimensions

18.31
[46.51] 2.83 2.83
19.00 [7.19] [7.19]
[48.26]

8.84
[22.45]

Max. Depth
of Unit:
10.50
[26.67]

6.19
[15.72]
NOTE: Dimensions in
brackets are in centimeters. Front View
Figure 5‑3  H2 Mounting Dimensions

5–4
 Installation – 5

Figure 5‑4  H3 and H4 Mounting Dimensions for GE L-2 Cabinet

5–5
 6 1 9 0 1 1 8 t h A V E N O .

5–6
5 6
1 2 3 4 7 8 10
9

B EC K W IT H E L ECT RIC C O . INC . W A R N IN G ! C O N T A C T W IT H T E R M IN A L S M A Y C A U S E E L E C T R IC S H O C K MODEL: M-3425 FIRMWARE: D-0070

R Danger! Contact avec les terminaux peut causer un choc electrique
C UL US 6 19 0 118 t h AV E NO . F O R C O N T A C T R A T IN G S S E E IN S T R U C T IO N MA NUA L 5 0 Hz 6 0 Hz S E RIA L NO .
LISTED L A RG O , F L 3 3 7 7 3 U.S. PATENT 5,592,393, 5,224,011
NRTL /C
IND.CONT.EQ. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
83F4 LR 89464

IRIG - B COM 2
RS 2 3 2
- + IN IN IN IN IN IN IN
6 5 4 3 2 1 RT N -

P S 2 P S 1
P/ S S E L F - T EST 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
RS 4 8 5 (5 2b) !
COM 3 F 1 F 2

IN PUT S A L A RM S O UT PUT S

V V V V
A B C N I I I
M‑3425 Instruction Book

FIELD GND A B C I Ia Ib I c PS 2 PS 1 PS 2 PS 1
VA B VB C VC A N
! COUPLER F1 F2
++ -- ++ --
3 A M P , 2 5 0 V ( 3 A B )

3 A M P ,2 5 0 V ( 3 A B )
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 F 3 F 4

RA T E D V O L T A G E RAT E D C URRE NT
1A ,NO M 5 A ,NO M 18 - 5 6 18 - 5 6
64F 6 0 - 14 0 ,5 0 / 6 0 Hz 85 265 85 265

F3 F4

Figure 5‑5  External Connections

s CAUTION: Application of external voltages to the INPUTS terminals may result in damage to the unit.
 NOTES:

1. All relays are shown in the de‑energized state.

2. Output contacts #1 through #4 are high speed operation contacts.
3. The power supply relay (P/S) is energized when the power supply is OK.
4. The self‑test relay is energized when the relay has performed all self‑tests successfully.
To fulfill requirements for UL and CSA listing, terminal block connections must be made with No. 22–12 AWG solid or stranded copper wire
inserted in an AMP #324915 (or equivalent) connector and wire insulation used must be rated at 75° C minimum.

Torque Requirements:
• Terminals 1–34: 12.0 in‑lbs
• Terminals 35–63: 8.0 in‑lbs, minimum, and 9.0 in‑lbs, maximum.
s CAUTION: Over torquing may result in terminal damage.
 Installation – 5

Three VT Wye-Wye
Three VT Wye-Wye Connection -
UTILITY SYSTEM Connection
A B C A B C Ungrounded
A B C Other
Relays M-3425
50 51
39 39
38 38
48 49
41
OR 41
40 40
46 47
43 43
42 42

M-3425

M-3425
52
Gen
A
B
C
OR
M-3921 Two VT Open-Delta
Generator Field Ground Connection
Coupler A B C
Module

M-3425
10
39
52b
11 38
A B C A B C A B C
Other 41
Relays M-3425 M-3425
M-3425
40
58 59 59 58 59 58

43

57 56 57 56 42

M-3425
56 57
OR OR
54 55 55 54 55 54

M-3425
52 53
M-3425

45

44
OR
High Impedance Grounding Low Impedance Grounding

Example of Control / Output Connections

M-3425
DC: 24 V + TRIP
POWER 60 62
48 V SUPPLY
61 63 11 10
OR - 16 15 12 13
DC: 110 V
125 V
220 V
250 V POWER
AC: 110 V 52b 60FL SELF-TEST
OK 52G
120 V BREAKER OSCILLOGRAPH TRIP FAILURE VT FUSE LOSS
230 V ALARM ALARM STATUS
FAILURE RECORDER ALARM
240 V INITIATE INITIATE

-
EXTERNAL INPUTS ALARM OUTPUTS CONTROL TRIP OUTPUT
OUTPUTS

Figure 5‑6  Three-Line Connection Diagram

5–7
M‑3425 Instruction Book

6. Display positive, negative and zero se‑

5.3 Commissioning Checkout quence voltages. Press ENTER until the
unit displays:
During field commissioning, check the following to
ensure that the CT and VT connections are correct.
POS SEQUENCE VOLTAGE
_______ Volts
1. Press ENTER. After a short delay, the
unit should display
The positive sequence voltage should be
VPOSy VA y VB y VC or VAB y VBC y VCA.
VOLTAGE RELAY
_OLT curr freq v/hz pwr 
V 7. Press ENTER until the unit displays:
2. Press the right arrow button until the unit
displays: NEG SEQUENCE VOLTAGE
0.0 Volts
STATUS
 config sys STAT
_ 
The negative sequence voltage should
3. Press ENTER. The unit should display: be VNEGy 0.

VOLTAGE STATUS 8. Press ENTER until the unit displays:

VOLT curr freq v/hz 
_

4. Press ENTER. The unit should display ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE

either VA, VB, VC (line-to-ground con‑ 0.0 Volts
nections) or VAB, VBC, VCA (line-to-line or
line‑ground to line-line connections).
The zero sequence voltage should be
VZEROy0.
PHASE VOLTAGE (VOLTS)
A= B= C= If the negative sequence voltage shows
a high value and the positive sequence
voltage is close to zero, the phase se‑
quence is incorrect and proper phases
Compare these voltages with actual mea‑ must be reversed to obtain correct phase
surements using a voltmeter. If there is a sequence. If the phase sequence is
discrepancy, check for loose connections incorrect, frequency- and power-related
to the rear terminal block of the unit. If functions will not operate properly and
line‑ground to line‑line voltage selection the Monitor Frequency Status menu
is used, the voltages displayed are S3 will read LOW VOLT DISABLE.
times of the line‑ground voltages applied.
If positive, negative and zero sequence
voltages are all present, check the polari‑
5. Press ENTER to display the Neutral Volt‑ ties of the VT connections and change
age: connections to obtain proper polarities.

NEUTRAL VOLTAGE 9. Press ENTER until the unit displays:

_______ Volts

The neutral voltage should be near zero 3RD HARMONIC NTRL VOLT
volts. 0.00 Volts

5–8
 Installation – 5

10. Press ENTER until the unit displays: 16. Press ENTER for the unit to display:

FIELD GND MEAS. CIRCUIT DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT

220.82 mV A= B= C=

11. Press ENTER until the unit displays: Differential current should be near zero
amps. If a significant amount of differ‑
ential current is present, check the CT
STATOR LOW FREQ. INJECT. polarities.
0.0 Volts

17. Press ENTER for the unit to display:

12. Press EXIT until the unit displays:
NEUTRAL CURRENT
VOLTAGE STATUS ________ Amps
VOLT curr freq v/hz 
The Neutral Current IN should be near
zero Amps.
13. Press the right arrow to display:
18. Press ENTER for the unit to display:
CURRENT STATUS
volt CURR freq v/hz  GND DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT
________ Amps

14. Press ENTER to display line currents (IA, 19. Press ENTER for the unit to display:
IB, IC). The unit should display:

POS SEQUENCE CURRENT

PHASE CURRENT ________ Amps
A= B= C=
The positive sequence current should be
IPOS y Ia y Ib y Ic.
Compare these currents with the mea‑
sured values using a meter. If there is a
discrepancy, check the CT connections 20. Press ENTER for the unit to display:
to the rear terminal block of the unit.
NEG SEQUENCE CURRENT
15. Press ENTER for the unit to display: 0.0 Amps

PHASE CURRENT Negative sequence current should near

a= b= c= zero amperes.

Compare these currents with the mea‑

sured values using a meter. If there is a
discrepancy, check the CT connections
to the rear terminal block of the unit.

5–9
M‑3425 Instruction Book

21. Press ENTER for the unit to display: 24. Press ENTER to display real power and
check its sign. The unit should display:
ZERO SEQUENCE CURRENT
0.0 Amps REAL POWER
____________ pu W

The zero sequence current should be The sign should be positive for forward
IZEROy0 A. If a significant amount of nega‑ power and negative for reverse power.
tive or zero sequence current (greater If the sign does not agree with actual
than 25% of IA, IB, IC,) then either the conditions, check the polarities of the
phase sequence or the polarities are three neutral-end CTs and/or the PTs.
incorrect. Modify connections to obtain
proper phase sequence and polarities.
25. Press ENTER for the unit to display:

22. Press ENTER for the unit to display:

REACTIVE POWER
__________ PU VAr
STATOR LOW FREQ. INJECT.
I = 0.0 mAmps 26. Press ENTER for the unit to display:

APPARENT POWER
23. Press EXIT, then the Right arrow to
display: pu
_ va

27. Press ENTER to display:

POWER STATUS
 POWER imped i/o timer 
POWER FACTOR
____ Lag/Lead

 NOTE: The CT and VT polarities can be easily

verified by looking at the oscillographic
waveforms, using IPSplot® analysis soft‑
ware.

5–10
 Installation – 5

5.4 Circuit Board Switches and

Jumpers

JUMPER POSITION DESCRIPTION

A to B Connects CD signal to Pin 1 of COM2 (Default)
J60
A to C Connects +15V to Pin 1 of COM2
A to B COM2 Pin 9 float (Default)
J61 B to C Connects -15V to Pin 9 of COM2
B to C Receiver disabled while transmitting (Default)
A to B COM3 200 ohm termination resistor inserted
J18
B to C COM3 no termination (Default)
A to B COM3 shares Baud Rate with COM1 (Default)
J46
B to C COM3 shared Baud Rate with COM2
AB Demodulated IRIG-B TTL signal on Pin 6 COM2
J5
BC Modulated IRIG-B signal BNC (Default
 NOTE: Short circuit protection (100 ma limit) is incorporated on pins 1 and 9 when used for +/- 15V.

Table 5‑1  Jumpers

Dipswitch SW1
1 2 3 4 Switches should not be changed while
unit is energized.
X X X Open (up)
X Closed (down)

3 up 4 up Run Mode

3 up 4 down Initialize EEPROM to default*

3 down 4 up Initialize Access Codes and Communication*

3 down 4 down Factory Use

2 up Flash Update Disable (Factory Default)

2 down Flash Update Enable

1 up Dual Power Supply Unit

1 down Single Power Supply Unit

* After power up, the OK LED light remains off and the Diagnostic LED
will illuminate when operation has been satisfactorily completed.

Table 5‑2 Dip Switch SW-1

5–11
5–12
       


    






 
 
 
















  
 
M‑3425 Instruction Book

 









       


   

      


   

      










  







        




 


    






    


 


 
    



 


       

       





 
 



 



    
 








    


 


 
 


        

      




   













   











 


  
    



 











 






  
  
  

            

 




  
       
 
   
     
 




      
  
   

 



  







    



   
   
 








 



   








 





















 







 





 














   

















   


 






  


     


    


  

  







Figure 5-7  M-3425 Circuit Board

          
 




  
 

 
  



 


          






   




 




 




 





























          


  




       
    



     




















       









































 Testing – 6

6 Testing

6.1 Equipment/Test Setup ......................................................................... 6–2

6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures ................................................................. 6–6
6.3 Auto-Calibration .................................................................................. 6–11
6.4 Functional Test Procedures ............................................................... 6–15
Power On Self Tests .......................................................................... 6–16
21 Phase Distance ............................................................................. 6–17
24 Volts per Hertz, Definite Time ....................................................... 6–19
24 Volts per Hertz, Inverse Time ....................................................... 6–20
27 RMS Undervoltage, 3-Phase ......................................................... 6–21
27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral ...................................... 6–22
32 Directional Power, 3-Phase ........................................................... 6–23
40 Loss of Field ................................................................................. 6–25
46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time .............................. 6–26
46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time .............................. 6–27
50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent ................................................. 6–28
50BF/50BF-N Breaker Failure ............................................................ 6–29
50/27 Inadvertent Energizing .............................................................. 6–31
50DT Definite Time Overcurrent for Split-Phase Differential .............. 6–32
50N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent ............................................ 6–33
51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent .............................................. 6–34
51T Inverse Time Positive Sequence Overcurrent for
Stator Thermal Protection .................................................................. 6–35
51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent with
Voltage Control/Restraint ................................................................... 6–36
59 RMS Overvoltage, 3-Phase ........................................................... 6–37
59N RMS Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence .................. 6–38
60FL VT Fuse Loss Detection ........................................................... 6–39
64F Field Ground Protection .............................................................. 6–40
64B Brush Lift Off Detection .............................................................. 6–42
78 Out of Step .................................................................................... 6–43
81 Frequency ..................................................................................... 6–44
81R Rate of Change of Frequency ..................................................... 6–45
87 Phase Differential .......................................................................... 6–47
87GD Ground Differential .................................................................. 6–48
EXT External Functions ..................................................................... 6–49

6–1
M-3425 Instruction Book

5. Electronic timer accurate to at least 8

6.1 Equipment/Test Setup ms.
6. For relays with the 64F/B option:
No calibration is necessary, as the M-3425
Generator Protection Relay is calibrated and fully
tested at the factory. If calibration is necessary a. Resistor decade box capable of
because of a component replacement, follow the 500 ohms to 150 kOhms, able to
auto calibration procedure detailed in Section 6.3, step in 100 ohm increments.
Auto Calibration (or see Section 5.4 for units without b. Capacitors ranging from 0.15 mf
an HMI). These test procedures are based on the to 10 μf.
prerequisite that the functions are enabled and
have settings as described in Chapter 2,
Application, and that the unit is fitted with the Setup
optional HMI module. 1. Connect system power to the power input
terminals 62 (hot) and 63 (neutral). The
relay can be ordered with a nominal input
Equipment Required
power supply of 110/120/230/240 Vac,
The following equipment is required to carry out the 110/125/220/250 Vdc or 24/48 Vdc. An
test procedures: optional redundant power supply is
available.
1. Two Digital Multimeters (DMM) with 10
A current range. Q NOTE: The proper voltage for the relay is clearly
2. 120 V ac or 0 to 125 V dc variable marked on the power supply label
supply for system power. affixed to the rear panel.
3. Three-phase independent voltage
sources (0 to 250 V) variable phase to 2. For each test procedure, connect the
simulate VT inputs. voltage and current sources according
to the configuration listed in the test
4. Three-phase independent current procedure and follow the steps outlined.
sources (0 to 25 A) variable phase to When the testing of one function may
simulate CT inputs. cause another function to operate
depending on the particular settings, it
is recommended the untested function
be disabled. (See Table 6-1.)

6–2
 Function Function to Dis able
Be ing
Te s te d 21 24DT 24IT 27 27TN 32 40 46 50 50/27 50BF 50DT 50N 51N 51T 51V 59 5 9 N 6 0 F L 6 4B 6 4F 78 81 8 1R 87 87GD

21 ✓ ✓ ✓
24DT ✓ ✓ ✓
24IT ✓ ✓ ✓
27 ✓
27TN
32 ✓ ✓
40 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
46 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
50 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
50/27 ✓ ✓ ✓
50BF ✓ ✓
50DT
50N ✓ ✓
51N ✓ ✓
51T
51V ✓ ✓ ✓
59
59N ✓
60F L ✓ ✓ ✓
64B ✓
64F ✓
78 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
81 ✓ ✓ ✓
81R ✓ ✓
87 ✓ ✓
87GD ✓ ✓

Table 6-1 Functions to Disable When Testing

Testing – 6

6–3
M-3425 Instruction Book

39 Polarity 55
Hot
Voltage
Input 1 VA = 120 V ac ∠0° Current Input 1 Ia ∠0°
38
Neutral 54
41
Hot
Voltage
57
Input 2 VB = 120 V ac ∠–120°
40
Neutral Current Input 2 Ib ∠–120°
56
43
Hot
Voltage VC = 120 V ac ∠120°
Input 3 59
42
Neutral
Current Input 3 Ic ∠120°
Figure 6-1 Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1 58

39
Figure 6-3 Current Inputs: Configuration C1
Hot
Voltage Input 1
120 Ð30° VAB = 120Ð0°
38
Neutral Polarity 47
41
Current Input 1 IA ∠0°
VBC = 120Ж120° 46
Neutral 40
Voltage Input 2
120 Ж90° 43 49
Hot
VCA = 120Ð120° Current Input 2 IB ∠–120°
42
48

45
Hot 51
Voltage Input 3
0 to 20 V ac VN
180 Hz
Neutral
44 IC ∠120°
50
Figure 6-2 Voltage Inputs: Configuration V2
Current Input 3
53
■ NOTE: The phase angles shown here use leading
IN
angles as positive and lagging angles as 52
negative. Some manufacturers of test
equipment have used lagging angles as Figure 6-4 Current Inputs: Configuration C2
positive, in which case VB=120 a a120°
and VC=120 a a240°. Similarly other
voltages and currents phase angles
should be adjusted. These test
configurations are for ABC phase
rotation. They must be adjusted
appropriately for ACB phase rotation.

6–4
 Testing – 6

Polarity 55
•
Current Input 1 aø 54 I 0°
a

57
•
o
bø 56 I 120
b

59
•
o
cø 58 I 240
c

Polarity 47
•
Current Input 2 AØ 46 I 0°
A

49
•
o
BØ 48 I 120
B

51
•
o
CØ 50 I 240
C

Figure 6-5 Current Configuration C3

6–5
M-3425 Instruction Book

RELAY
6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures OUTPUT
NORM ALLY OPEN NORM ALLY CLOSED
CONTACT CONTACT*
NUM BER

The diagnostic procedures perform basic functional 1 33- 34 --

tests to verify the operation of the front-panel 2 31- 32 --
controls, inputs and outputs, and communication
3 29- 30 --
ports. These tests are performed in diagnostic
mode, which is entered in the following manner: 4 27- 28 --
5 25- 26 --
1. Press ENTER to begin main menu. 6 23- 24 --

2. Press the right arrow button until SETUP 7 21- 20 21- 22

UNIT appears on the top line of the 8 18- 17 18- 19
display.
9
15- 14 15- 16
3. Press ENTER to access the SETUP (Se lf-Te s t)
UNIT menu. 10
(Powe r -- 13- 12
4. Press the right arrow button until Supply)
DIAGNOSTIC MODE appears in the
*" Normal" posit ion of t he cont act corresponds t o t he OFF (de-energized) st at e
display. of t he relay.

5. Press ENTER. A reset warning appears:

PROCESSOR WILL RESET! (Relay Table 6-2 Output Contacts
functions are inoperative in Diagnostic
Mode.) Following completion of output contact positions in
the de-energized or OFF position, the output status
6. Press ENTER. Unit will reset and can be turned ON in the following manner:
DIAGNOSTIC MODE will be temporarily
displayed, followed by OUTPUT TEST
(RELAY). This is the beginning of the 1. Press ENTER. The following is
diagnostic menu. displayed:

The diagnostic menu includes the following tests: RELAY NUMBER

Output, Input, Status LED, Target LED, Button, 1
Display, COM1/COM2/COM3 Loopback, COM3
2-Wire, Clock, Flash Relay OK, and Auto
Calibration. Each is described individually in this 2. Press ENTER. The following is
chapter (Auto Calibration is described in detail in displayed:
Section 6.3, Auto Calibration). The left arrow and
right arrow buttons are used to move within the
diagnostic menu. RELAY NUMBER 1
OFF on
After EXIT is pushed, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT
DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed.
3. Use the right arrow button to change
Output Test (Relay) ON to upper case letters, which signifies
selection.
The first step in testing the operation of the function
outputs is to confirm the positions of the outputs in
the unoperated or OFF position. This can be 4. Press ENTER. The following is
accomplished by connecting a DMM (Digital displayed:
Multimeter) across the appropriate contacts and
confirming open or closed. The de-energized or RELAY NUMBER
OFF positions for each output is listed in Table 1
6-2.

6–6
 Testing – 6

Choose outputs 2 through 8 by using the up arrow 3. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
and down arrow buttons to turn all relays or outputs
to the energized or ON position. Note that when
INPUT NUMBER 1
each output is turned on, the appropriate red
OUTPUT LED turns on and stays on. CIRCUIT OPEN

The DMM can now be used to verify the position of

the output contacts in the operated or ON position. 4. Connect IN COM terminal (terminal #11)
The readings should be the opposite of the initial to IN1 terminal (terminal #10). See Table
reading above. All outputs should be returned to 6-3.
their initial de-energized or OFF positions (OUTPUT Alternatively, if this specific input is being
LEDs will go out when each output is turned off) used in this application and the external
before pushing EXIT to return to the DIAGNOSTIC wiring is complete, the actual external
MODE menu. status input contact can be manually
closed. This will test the input contact
Input Test (Status) operation and the external wiring to the
input contacts. The following is
The INPUT TEST menu enables the user to
immediately displayed:
determine the status of the individual status inputs.
Individual inputs can be selected by number using
the up and down arrow buttons. The status of the INPUT NUMBER 1
input will then be displayed. CIRCUIT CLOSED

INPUT COMMON 5. Disconnect IN COM terminal (terminal

TERMINAL #11) from IN1 terminal (terminal #10).
NUMBER TERMINAL
The following is immediately displayed:
1 (52b) 11 10
INPUT NUMBER 1
2 11 9 CIRCUIT OPEN

3 11 8
6. Press ENTER. The following is
4 11 7 displayed:

5 11 6
INPUT NUMBER
1
6 11 5

Table 6-3 Input Contacts 7. Use the up arrow button to go to the

next input. Repeat the procedure using
1. When OUTPUT TEST (RELAY) is the contacts as shown in Table 6-3.
displayed, press the right arrow button When finished, press EXIT to return to
until the following is displayed: the DIAGNOSTIC MODE menu.

INPUT TEST (STATUS)

output INPUT led target J

2. Press ENTER. The following is

displayed:

INPUT NUMBER
1

6–7
M-3425 Instruction Book

Status LED Test Target LED Test

The STATUS LED TEST menu enables the user to The TARGET LED TEST menu allows the user to
check the front-panel LEDs individually. check the M-3925 Target Module LEDs individually.

COM 1
RELAY BRKR
OK CLOSED TARGET PS 1
TARGET
TARGETS
RESET
24 VOLTS/HZ PHASE OVERCURRENT 50
27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE PHASE OVERCURRENT 51V
TIME OSC. DIAG PS 2
59 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT 50N
SYNC TRIG
27TN/64S 100% STATOR GND NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT 51N
59N NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE SPLIT PHASE DIFF 50DT
32 DIRECTIONAL POWER POS SEQ OVERCURRENT 51T

M-3425 21
40
PHASE DISTANCE
LOSS OF FIELD
NEG SEQ OVERCURRENT
FIELD GND/BRUSH LIFT 64F/B
46

GENERATOR PROTECTION 78 OUT OF STEP FREQUENCY/ROCOF 81/81R

50BF BREAKER FAILURE PHASE DIFF CURRENT 87
50/27 INADVERTENT ENRGNG GND DIFF CURRENT 87GD

60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS EXTERNAL EXT

BECKWITH CO. INC.
ELECTRIC

Made in U.S.A. OUTPUTS

OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7

OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8

Figure 6-6 Status LED Panel

1. When INPUT TESTS (STATUS) is

displayed, press the right arrow button Figure 6-7 M-3925 Target Module Panel
until the following is displayed:
1. When STATUS LED TEST is displayed,
press the right arrow button until the
STATUS LED TEST following is displayed:
output input LED target J
TARGET LED TEST
2. Press ENTER. LED #1 (RELAY OK) output input led TARGET J
lights and the following is displayed:

2. Press ENTER. Target LED #1 lights

STATUS LED TEST and the following is displayed:
LED NUMBER 1 = ON
TARGET LED TEST
3. Repeat step 2 for the LEDs shown in LED NUMBER 1 = ON
Figure 6-6, with the exception of PS1 &
PS2 LEDs.
3. Repeat step 2 for each LED shown in
Figure 6-7. When all LEDs have been
4. Press EXIT to return to the tested, press EXIT to return to the
DIAGNOSTIC MODE menu. DIAGNOSTIC MODE menu. Pressing
the TARGET RESET button on the front
panel also provides a simultaneous test
for all TARGET LEDs.

Expanded Input/Output Test

Not implemented at this time.

6–8
 Testing – 6

Button Test Display Test

The BUTTON TEST menu selection allows the The DISPLAY TEST menu selection enables the
user to check the M-3931 HMI Module buttons. As user to check the display. This test cycles through
each button is pressed, its name is displayed. varying test patterns until EXIT is pressed.

1. When BUTTON TEST is displayed,

press the right arrow button until the
following is displayed:

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.

M-3425 DISPLAY TEST
Iex_io button DISPJ
a

2. Press ENTER. The unit will display a

a sequence of test characters until EXIT
a is pushed.
3. After the test has cycled through
completely, press EXIT to return to the
a

DIAGNOSTIC MODE menu.

EXIT ENTER

COM1/COM2/COM3 Loopback Test

The COM1 LOOPBACK TEST menu allows the
Figure 6-8 M-3931 Human-Machine user to check the front-panel RS-232C port. A
Interface Module loop-back plug is required for this test. COM2
LOOPBACK TEST menu checks the rear panel
RS-232C port.
1. When the TARGET LED TEST is
displayed, press the right arrow button
until the following is displayed: M-3425
COM1/COM2
BUTTON TEST DB9P
Iex_io BUTTON disp J 1
RX 2
TX 3
2. Press ENTER. The following is 4
displayed: SGND 5
6
BUTTON TEST RTS 7
0 CTS 8
9
Figure 6-9 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug
3. Press each button for test. As each
button is pressed, the display will briefly
Q NOTE: The loopback plug required consists of a
show the name for each key (“RIGHT
DB9P connector (male) with pin 2 (RX)
ARROW”, “UP ARROW”, etc).
connected to pin 3 (TX) and pin 7 (RTS)
connected to pin 8 (CTS). No other
Q NOTE: Pressing the EXIT button will exit from connections are necessary.
this test, so it should be tested last. If it
is pushed before this test sequence is
completed, the test may be restarted
by pushing ENTER. Notice that the
word EXIT is displayed temporarily
before the test sequence is exited.

6–9
 M-3425 Instruction Book

1. When DISPLAY TEST is displayed, 2. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:

press the right arrow button until the
following is displayed:
COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE
IDLING...9600, N, 8, 1
COM1 LOOPBACK TEST
ICOM1 com2 com3 clockJ
3. On the rear of the unit, connect a PC to
the relay at terminals 3(-) and 4(+) via
2. Press ENTER. The following is RS-485 converter set for 2-wire
displayed: operation. See Figure 6-10 for diagram.

COM1 LOOPBACK TEST 3 4

CONNECT LOOPBACK PLUG RS-485
RS-232
+ RS-232 to RS-485
converter or PC card
(2 wire)
3. Connect the loop-back plug to COM1, -
the front-panel RS-232C connector.
4. Press ENTER. After the test, the - +
following is displayed:

COM1 LOOPBACK TEST

-DONE- RS-485
Computer
COM3

Figure 6-10 RS-485 2-Wire Testing

5. Press EXIT to return to the
DIAGNOSTIC MODE menu. 4. Set the following PC communications
6. When COM1 TEST is displayed, press parameters:
the right arrow button until COM2 TEST
appears and repeat steps 1 through 5 Baud Rate 9600
for COM2. Continue to COM3 TEST.
Parity None
COM3 Test (2-Wire) Data Bits 8
The COM3 Echo Test 2-Wire allows the user to test Stop Bits 1
the RS-485 rear terminal connections for proper
operation. Duplex Half
5. Open the terminal emulator program on
Q NOTE: This test requires a PC with an RS-485 the PC and open the COM port for the
converter and terminal emulator RS-485 converter.
software installed.
6. Press a key on the PC keyboard. Verify
that the character pressed shows
1. When COM2 LOOPBACK TEST is temporarily on the relay’s display, and
displayed, press the right arrow button appears on the PC monitor.
until the following is displayed: 7. When communication has been verified,
press EXIT. The following is displayed:
COM3 ECHO TEST 2 WIRE
I com1 com2 COM3 clockJ COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE
-DONE-

8. Close the COM port on the PC, and exit

the terminal program.

6–10
 Testing – 6

Clock Test 3. Use the right arrow key to select “ON”,

CLOCK TEST and press Enter. The unit will display
Icom1 com2 com3 CLOCKJ
FLASH RELAY OK LED
-DONE-
1. Press ENTER for the unit to display:

CLOCK TEST 4. Press Exit to return to the former menu.

01-Jan-2001 01:01:80
Auto Calibration
Refer to the following Section 6.3, Auto Calibration,
2. Pressing ENTER will start the clock for for more information on that function.
testing, and unit will display:

AUTO CALIBRATION
CLOCK TEST I clock led CAL factory
CLOCK START

Factory Use Only

3. Repeat number 2 above to stop clock.
This function is provided to allow access by factory
4. When finished, press EXIT twice. After personnel.
initial press of EXIT, unit will display:
FACTORY USE ONLY
CLOCK TEST I clock led cal FACTORY
-DONE-

Q NOTE: ‘80’ will be displayed in the seconds

place when the clock is stopped. To
preserve battery life, the clock should
be stopped if the unit is to be powered
down for long periods of time.

Flash Relay OK LED Test

1. Press the right arrow until the unit
displays:

FLASH RELAY OK LED

I clock LED cal factory

2. Press ENTER. Unit will display:

FLASH RELAY OK LED

OFF on

6–11
M-3425 Instruction Book

Q NOTE: The phase angle difference between

6.3 Auto Calibration voltage and current input source should
be 0°, K0.05°, and an accurate low-
Q NOTE: The M-3425 Generator Protection Relay distortion source should be used. (THD
has been fully calibrated at the factory. less than 1%).
There is no need to recalibrate the unit
prior to initial installation (In-system
5. Press ENTER. The display will show
calibration of the 64F function may be WAIT while the relay is being calibrated.
needed for units purchased with the 64F
When calibration is complete, the display
Field Ground option). Calibration can be
will read CONNECT 180 Hz INPUTS
initiated via the HMI or IPSutil™ program. (150 Hz for 50 Hz models).
6. Remove the calibration source inputs. If
Phase and Neutral Fundamental Calibration you wish to calibrate the third harmonic,
1. Enter Diagnostic Mode and press the continue to Third Harmonic Calibration.
right arrow button until the following is If not, press EXIT to exit calibration
displayed: mode.

AUTO CALIBRATION Third Harmonic Calibration

I CAL factory 1. If the user wishes to calibrate the third
harmonic only, follow the Step #1 and
#2 procedures for calibration (above),
2. Press ENTER. The following is and press the down arrow when the
displayed: display reads CONNECT 60 Hz
INPUTS. The display will then read
CONNECT 180 Hz INPUTS (150 Hz for
CONNECT REFERENCE INPUTS 50 Hz models).
PRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE
2. Connect VN=10 V, 180 Hz (150 Hz for 50
Hz units). See Figure 6-12.
3. Connect V A = V B = V C = V N = 3. Press ENTER. The display will show
120.0(±0.01)V at 0° phase. (See Figure WAIT while the third harmonic is
6-12.) calibrated. When calibration is complete,
4. Connect I a=I b=I c =I A =I B =I C =I N =5.00** it will show DONE.
Amps at 0° (see Figure 6-11). 4. Remove the voltage from VN.
** For a 1 A CT rating, use 1 A.

The calibration can be verified by reading status:

VA=VB=VC=V N=120V V1=V2=0 V0=120V
IA=IB=IC=5 A** I1=I2=0 I0=5 A*
Ia=Ib=Ic=5 A*

Real=1 pu Reactive=0.0 pu

Power Factor = 1.0

Idiffa = Idiffb = Idiffc = 0

Where subscript 0, 1, and 2 represent zero, positive,

and negative sequence quantities, respectively.
** For a 1 A CT rating, use 1 A.

6–12
 Testing – 6

Field Ground Calibration 3. Set the decade box for 1kΩ resistance
Field Ground Calibration only applies to units and press ENTER. When the display
purchased with the 64F Field Ground option. shows DONE press ENTER.
Calibration is necessary for long cable lengths 4. Set the decade box to the resistance
(greater than 100 feet) to compensate for cabling specified by the HMI, and press ENTER.
losses from the M-3425 and the M-3921 Coupler When the display shows DONE press
module, and therefore should be accomplished in ENTER.
system, after all wiring is complete.
5. Continue step 4 until the calibration is
complete for 100 kΩ.
1. Connect the M-3921 Field Ground
Coupler box as shown in Figure 6-13, 6. Press EXIT twice to exit Diagnostic
Field Ground Coupler Calibration. Mode.

2. Enter the Calibration menu in Diagnostic

mode and select the FIELD_GND item
and press ENTER. The display will show
CONNECT 1KOHM REF. PRESS
ENTER TO CALIBRATE.

Polarity 55 47 39
Hot
Ia IA Voltage
54 46 Input VA
38
Neutral
57 49
41
Ib IB
56 48
VB
Current Input 40
59 51
Ic IC
58 50
43

53
VC
42
IN
52
45
Hot
Voltage
Input VN
44
Neutral

Figure 6-11 Current Input Configuration Figure 6-12 Voltage Input Configuration

6–13
M-3425 Instruction Book

M-3425

PROCESSOR

Field Ground
Detection

Squarewave Vout 3 Shorted during calibration. Remove

Generator 37 5 before placing into service.
Coupling
35 4 Network 2
Signal
M-3921
Measurement Rf Cf*
Vf
and
Processing
36 1 1
Discrete Capacitor to
simulate Field Winding
Rear Terminal
Capacitance
Block Pin No.

Decade Box or Discrete Resistor

to simulate Fault Resistance

* If the rotor is NOT connected, the value of Cf should approximate

the rotor capacitance. If the rotor is connected Cf is NOT required.

Figure 6-13 Field Ground Coupler Calibration

8 WARNING: The jumper used to short pins 2 & 3 must be removed when calibration is
complete. Placing the M-3921 in service with this jumper installed will result in serious dam-
age.

6–14
 Testing – 6

The tests are described in this section in ascending

6.4 Functional Test Procedures function number order as used in Chapter 2,
Application. Depending on which functions are to
This section details test quantities, inputs and be tested at a given time, an order may be
procedures for testing each relay function. The determined with the aid of Table 6-1, Functions to
purpose is to confirm the functions’ designated Disable When Testing. This may result in the fewer
output operation, the accuracy of the magnitude changes in connections and disable/enable
pickup settings, and the accuracy of time delay operations.
settings. Whereas the first test described, “Power
On Self Test”, does not require electrical quantity During the lifetime of the relay, testing of individual
inputs, all other functional tests do require inputs, functions due to changes in application settings
and the necessary connection configurations are will be more likely than an overall testing routine.
noted. An index of the individual test procedures is
illustrated at the beginning of this chapter.
In all test descriptions, a process for calculating
input quantities to test the actual settings of the Q NOTE: Care must be taken to reset or enable
function will be given if needed. In many test cases, any functions that have been changed
it will be necessary to disable other functions not from their intended application settings
being tested at the time. This action is to prevent when the test procedures are complete.
the operation of multiple functions with one set of
input quantities, which could cause confusion of
operation of outputs or timers. The complete Many options for test sequences and methods are
description of the method to disable/enable possible. As an example, the operation of the
functions may be found in detail in Section 3.2, output contacts can be tested along with the
Configure Relay Data subsection or Chapter 4, operation of the LEDs in the Diagnostic Test
Remote Operation. The complete description of Procedures. The operation of the output contacts
the method to install setting quantities may be may also be confirmed with the LED and function
found in Section 3.2, Setpoints and Time Settings operation during Functional Test Procedures, if
subsection. desired.

It is desirable to record and confirm the actual If timer quantities are to be checked, the timer
settings of the individual functions before beginning must be activated by the appropriate output
test procedures. Use Figure A-3, Functional contacts. The contact pin numbers are enumerated
Configuration Record Form and Figure A-4, in Table 6-2, Output Contacts.
Setpoint & Timing Record Form, found in Appendix
It is suggested that copies of the following be
A, Configuration Record Forms, to record settings. made for easy referral during test procedures:
It is also possible to download the relay settings
into a file using IPScom®.
Input Configurations – pg 6–4
It may be desirable to program all test settings in Output Contact Numbers – pg 6–6
an alternate profile, or to save the relay settings in Relay Configuration Table – pg A–2
IPScom to preserve desired setup.
Setpoint & Timing Record Form – pg A–9

6–15
M-3425 Instruction Book

Power On Self Tests

VOLTAGE INPUTS: none

CURRENT INPUTS: none

1. Apply proper power to the power input terminals: 60 (HOT) and 61 (NEUTRAL).

2. The unit will display:

POWER ON SELFTESTS
XXXXXXxxxxxxxxxxx

3. All LEDs will turn on simultaneously for about 1 sec. The POWER and RELAY OK LEDs will
remain on; the rest of the LEDs will turn off.
The unit will display:

POWER ON SELFTESTS
PASS

The model number:

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.

M-3425

where “xx.xx.x”, x signifies the software revision;

BECKWITH ELECTRIC
D-0024xx.xx.x

where “xxx” signifies the unit serial number:

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.

SERIAL NUMBER xxx

The POWER LED(s) will turn on. The RELAY OK LED will flash (or stay on as programmed in the setup
menu) and the BREAKER CLOSED LED will remain on. The power-on self-tests ends with the system
date and time and default logo. Any recorded targets are then displayed.

6–16
 Testing – 6

21 Phase Distance (#1 or #2) Line to Line

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS:Configuration C1

TEST SETTINGS: Diameter P ohms (0.1 to 100)

1 Amp CT Rating (0.5 to 500.0)
Offset O ohms (–100 to 100)
1 Amp CT Rating (–500.0 to 500.0)
Impedance Angle A degrees (0 to 90)
Time Delay D cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z output (1 to 8)

Functions 27, 27TN, 32, 40 Disable

Functions 50/27, 51V Disable
Functions 60FL, 21 (1 or 2) Disable
Functions 78, 87 Disable
Delta-Y Transform Disable

Q NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the function with the higher “reach” (Diameter plus
Offset) setting first (lower current ), and test the lower reach setting operation, since the higher
reach setting operation can be tested without disabling the lower setting.

1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure
Relay Data subsection, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect input in Configuration V1 and C1 as designated above. Refer to Section 6.1,
Equipment/Test Setup for configurations.
4. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual setting is as follows:
a. Define “reach” as R ohms = (P ohms + O ohms) [O, usually set at zero ohms].
b. Define “current” as I = ((Selected Voltage/S3)I R ohms). The voltage level may be selected
based on the desired test current level.
5. Pickup Test: Set the three-phase voltages to the Selected Voltage value from step 4b. Set the
phase angle between the voltage and current inputs at (A – 30°) degrees from settings above.
Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the three-phase currents until the
appropriate 21 PHASE DISTANCE LED light goes on, or the pickup indicator operates on the
computer target screen. The level should be equal to I calculated in step 4 with the resulting
impedance &0.1 ohms or 5%. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the INPUT
CURRENTS, and OUTPUT LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
6. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately 110% of
the current (I) found in step 4, and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within &1
cycle or &1%.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–17
M-3425 Instruction Book

21 Phase Distance (#1 or #2) Line to Ground

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1

TEST SETTINGS: Diameter P ohms (0.1 to 100)

1 Amp CT Rating (0.5 to 500.0)
Offset O ohms (–100 to 100)
1 Amp CT Rating (–500.0 to 500.0)
Impedance Angle A Degrees (0 to 90)
Time Delay D cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z output (1 to 8)

VT Configuration Line-Ground
Functions 27, 27TN, 32, 40 Disable
Functions 50/27, 51V Disable
Functions 60FL, 21 (1 or 2) Disable
Functions 78, 87 Disable
Delta-Y Transform Disable

Q NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the function with the higher “reach” (Diameter plus
Offset) setting first (lower current), and test the lower reach setting operation, since the higher
reach setting operation can be tested without disabling the lower setting.

1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure
Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect input in Configuration V1 and C1 as designated above. Refer to Section 6.1,
Equipment/Test Setup for configurations.
4. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual setting is as follows:
a. Define “reach” as R ohms = (P ohms + O ohms),[O, usually set at zero ohms].
b. Define “current” as I = ((Selected Voltage)IR ohms). The voltage level may be selected
based on the desired test current level
5. Pickup Test: Set the three-phase voltages to the Selected Voltage value from step 4b. Set the
phase angle between the voltage and current inputs at (A) degrees from setting above. Hold the
TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the three-phase currents on the input until the
appropriate 21 PHASE DISTANCE LED light goes on, or the pickup indicator operates on the
computer target screen. The level should be equal to I calculated in step 4 with the resulting
impedance &0.1 ohms or 5%. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the INPUT
CURRENTS, and OUTPUT LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
6. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately 110% of
the current (I) found in step 4, and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within &1
cycle or &1%.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–18
 Testing – 6

24 Volts/Hz Definite Time (#1 or #2)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: V1
CURRENT INPUTS:none

TEST SETTINGS: Definite Time Pickup P % (100 to 200)

Time Delay D cycles (30 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 24IT, 27, 27TN Disable

Function 24 DT (#1 or #2) Disable
Functions 32, 59, 81, 81R Disable

Q NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the 24 Definite Time function with the lower pickup setting
first and test the higher setting operation. Since the lower setting operation can be tested without
disabling the higher setting, the 24 Definite Time functions will be enabled when the tests are complete.

1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect input in Configuration V1 as designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup for configurations.
4. The Volts per Hertz pickup level at a percentage setting at nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is:
Pickup voltage = (P% ÷ 100) x (Nominal Voltage) where the Nominal Values have been
programmed in the system setup data described in Section 2.1, Configuration and are recorded
on the COMMUNICATION & UNIT SETUP RECORD FORM.
5. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the voltage on A phase
until the 24 VOLTS/HZ LED light goes on or the pickup indicator operates on the computer
target screen. The voltage level of operation will equal P volts ±1%. Release the TARGET
RESET button and decrease the voltage and the output LEDs will go out. Press TARGET
RESET button to remove targets.
6. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately (P + 10
volts) volts and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within 25 cycles.
7. Test phases B and C by repeating steps 4 and 5.
8. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–19
M-3425 Instruction Book

24 Volts/Hz Inverse Time

VOLTAGE INPUTS: V1
CURRENT INPUTS:none
TEST SETTINGS: Inverse Time Pickup P % (100 to 200)
Inverse Time Curve C (1 to 4)
Time Dial (curve 1) K (1 to 100)
Time Dial (Curves 2-4) (0.0 to 9.0)
Reset Rate R seconds (1 to 999)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)
Functions 24DT, 27, 27TN Disable
Functions 32, 59, 81, 81R Disable

1. Set 24DT #1 Pickup to 200%, and Delay to 30 cycles.

2. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
3. Confirm settings to be tested.
4. Connect voltage input in Configuration V1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup for configurations.
5. The Volts per Hertz pickup level of a percentage setting at nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is:
Pickup voltage = (P% ÷ 100) x (Nominal Voltage) where the Nominal Values have been
programmed in the system setup data described in Section 2.1, Configuration and are recorded
on the Figure A-2, Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form.
6. Test levels may be chosen at any percentages of Nominal Voltage which are a minimum of 5%
higher than the pickup percentage, P%. (Suggest 4 or 5 test levels chosen and calculated in
Step 5.)
7. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the voltage on A phase
until the VOLTS/HZ LED light goes on or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target
screen. The voltage level of operation will equal P volts ±1%. Release the TARGET RESET
button and decrease the voltage and the output LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET
button to remove targets.
8. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply voltage equal to the
chosen test level calculated in step 5 on A phase and start timing. The operating time will be as
read from the appropriate Inverse Curve Family and K (Time Dial) setting (refer to Appendix D,
Inverse Time Curves). The measured time should be within the time corresponding to &1% of
the pickup value.
9. Repeat step 6 for all test levels chosen. The curve portion extending to lower than P% V/Hz
values are inactive and can be ignored. The tested points verify the operating times of the
function.
10. To test the reset time, begin timing immediately when the input voltage is reduced below pickup
value.
11. Holding the TARGET RESET Button in, stop timing when the TARGET LED goes out. The time
should be the reset time within ±1 cycle or ±1%, whichever is greater.
12. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.
Q NOTE: If retesting is required, the unit should be powered down or wait for the programmed reset
time period before the next test to assure resetting of the timer.

6–20
 Testing – 6

27 RMS Undervoltage, 3 Phase (#1 or #2)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS:None
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (5 to 180)
Time Delay Y Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 21, 27 (#1 or #2) Disable

Functions 27TN, 32, 40 Disable
Functions 60FL, 78 Disable

Q NOTE: If 27 #1 and 27 #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one with the
higher setting first and test the lower setting operation. The higher setting operation could then
be tested without disabling the lower setting.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test Setup
for configuration. Set at Nominal Voltage.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly decrease the input voltage on
phase A until 27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE LED light goes on (or the pickup indicator operates
on the computer target screen). The voltage level should be equal to P volts ±0.5 V*. Release
the TARGET RESET button and increase the input to the nominal voltage and the OUTPUT
LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately (P – 1)
volts and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within 20 cycles or &1%(RMS), or
&1 cycle or &0.5% (DFT), whichever is greater.
6. Test phases B and C by repeating steps 4 and 5.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

* When both RMS and Line-Ground to Line-Line is selected, the accuracy is &0.8V or &0.75%

6–21
M-3425 Instruction Book

27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral (#1 or #2)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V2

CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (0.3 to 20.0)
Time Delay Y cycles (1 to 8160)
Undervoltage Inhibit Volts (5 to 180)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT ( 1 to 8)

Function 27TN (#1 or #2) Disable

Functions 27, 32 Disable

Q NOTE: If 27TN #1 and 27 #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one
with the higher setting first and test the lower setting operation. The higher setting operation could
then be tested without disabling the lower setting.

1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V2 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test Setup
for configuration. Set at Nominal Voltage.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly decrease the neutral voltage until
27TN/64S 100% STATOR GND LED light goes on (or the pickup indicator operates on the
computer target screen). The voltage level should be equal to P volts ±0.15 V or ±1%. Release
the TARGET RESET button and increase the input to the nominal voltage and the OUTPUT
LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately (P – 1)
volts and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within ±1 cycle or &1%.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–22
 Testing – 6

32 Directional Power, Line to Ground, 3 Phase (#1, #2)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS:Configuration C1

TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P PU (-3.000 to +3.000)

Time Delay D cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 21, 32 (#1 or #2) Disable

Functions 27TN, 40, 50/27 Disable
Functions 60FL, 78, 87 Disable
VT Configuration Line-Ground

Q NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the function with the lower pickup setting first and test the
higher setting operation. Since the lower setting operation can be tested without disabling the higher
setting, the 32 functions will be enabled when the tests are complete.

1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup for configurations.
4. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual power setting is as
follows: Multiply the PU pickup value (P above) by the Nominal Current previously input to the
relay. This value is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded on Figure
A-2, Communication Data and Unit Setup Record Form.
5. Set the three phase voltages to the Nominal Voltage.
6. Pickup Test: Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and slowly increase the three phase
currents (for negative or reverse power flow direction, the phase angle of the phase currents
are set at 180 degrees from the respective phase voltages). Increase the currents until the 32
DIRECTIONAL POWER LED light goes on or the pickup indicator operates on the computer
target screen. The level of operation will be equal to that calculated in step 4, ±2% or ±0.002
PU, whichever is greater.
7. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the currents. The OUTPUT LEDs will go
out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
8. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately 110% of
the pickup current and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within +16 cycles.
9. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–23
M-3425 Instruction Book

32 Directional Power, 3 Phase Line to Line (#1, #2)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V2

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1

TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P PU (-3.000 to +3.000)

Time Delay D cycles (1 to 8160)
Low Forward Power Disable
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 21, 32 (#1 or #2) Disable

Functions 27TN, 40, 50/27 Disable
Functions 60FL, 78, 87 Disable
VT Configuration Line-Line

Q NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the function with the lower pickup setting first and test the higher
setting operation. Since the lower setting operation can be tested without disabling the higher
setting, the 32 functions will be enabled when the tests are complete.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup for configurations.
4. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual power setting is as
follows: Multiply the PU pickup value (P above) by the Nominal Current previously input to the
M-3425. This value is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded on Figure
A-2, Communication Data and Unit Setup Record Form.
5. Set the three phase voltages to the Nominal Voltage.
6. Pickup Test: Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and slowly increase the three phase
currents (–30° angle for each phase). (Q NOTE: For negative or reverse power flow direction,
the phase angle of these currents are set to 180 degrees). Increase the current until the 32
DIRECTIONAL POWER LED light goes on or the pickup indicator operates on the computer
target screen. The level of operation will be equal to that calculated in step 4, ± 2% or &0.002
PU.
7. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the currents. The OUTPUT LEDs will go
out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
8. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately 110% of
the pickup current and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within +16 cycles.
9. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–24
 Testing – 6

40 Loss of Field (#1 or #2)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1
TEST SETTINGS: Diameter P ohms (0.1 to 100)
Offset O ohms (–50 to 50)
Time Delay D cycles (1 to 8160)
Voltage Control V Volts (5 to 180)
Directional Element E degrees (–13)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)
Functions 21, 27, 27TN Disable
Functions 32, 50/27, 60FL Disable
Functions 78, 87
Function 40 Volt Control Disable
Function 40 (#1 or #2) Disable
VT Configuration Line-Ground
Q NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the function with the higher “reach” (diameter minus offset)
setting first (lower current) and test the lower “reach” setting operation. Since the higher setting
operation can be tested without disabling the lower setting, the 40 functions will be enabled when
the tests are complete.

1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup for configurations.
4. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual setting is as follows:
a. Define “reach” as R ohms = (P - O ohms) where O is usually negative.
b. Define “trip current” as I = (Selected Voltage ÷ R ohms). The voltage level may be
selected based on the desired test current level.
c. Define “offset current” as IO = (Selected Voltage ÷ O ohms).
5. Set the three-phase voltages VA, VB, and VC to the Selected Voltage value from step 4, and
set the phase angle between the voltage and current inputs to 90° (current leading voltage).
6. Pickup Test: Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and slowly increase the three-phase
currents until the appropriate 40 LOSS OF FIELD LED light goes on or the pickup indicator
operates on the computer target screen. The level will be equal to “I” calculated in step 4 with
the resulting impedance within &0.1 ohms or &5%. If the offset is negative, continue to
increase the current until the LED light goes out. The level will be equal to “IO” calculated in step
4 with the resulting offset impedance within ±0.1 ohms or ±5%.
7. Release TARGET RESET button and decrease the currents and OUTPUT LEDs will go out.
Press TARGET RESET button to reset targets.
8. Time Test: Set the three-phase voltages VA, VB, and VC to the Selected Voltage value from
step 4, and set the phase angle between the voltage and current inputs to 90° (current leading
voltage). With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply I + 10% Amps and start
timing. Contacts will close within &1 cycle or &1%.
9. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.
(For proper testing, use I ≤3 x CT rating)

6–25
M-3425 Instruction Book

46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1 (MODIFIED)
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup Def Time P % (3 to 100)
Time Delay D cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Function 27TN, 32, 50 Disable

Functions 51T, 51V, 87 Disable
Function 46 Inv Time Disable

Q NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 46 function, it is suggested that
Nominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for
operation. If other functions operate during these tests they should also be disabled for the test and
enabled after the tests are complete.

1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 (MODIFIED) designated above. The modification to
C1 (See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test Setup for configuration) is to exchange Current input 2
and 3 (phase B current = input 3 and phase C current = input 2). Set Voltages = Nominal
voltage.
4. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual setting is: Pickup
current = (P% ÷ 100) x (Nominal Current) where the Nominal Values have been programmed
in the system setup data described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded on
Figure A-2, Communication Data and Unit Setup Record Form.
5. Pickup Test: Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and slowly increase the three-phase
currents until the appropriate NEG SEQ OVERCURRENT 46 LED light goes on or the pickup
indicator operates on the computer target screen. The level will be equal to pickup current
calculated in step 4 ±0.5% of 5 A.
6. Release TARGET RESET button and decrease the currents and OUTPUT LEDs will go out.
Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
7. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply current of at least (1.1 x
pickup) amps and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within &1 cycle or &1%.
8. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

(For proper testing, use I ≤3 x CT rating)

6–26
 Testing – 6

46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1 (MODIFIED)
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup Inv Time P % (3 to 100)
Time Dial Setting K (1 to 95)
Maximum Trip Time D cycles (600 to 65,500)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT ( 1 to 8)

Function 27TN, 32, 50 Disable

Functions 51T, 51V, 87 Disable
Function 46 Definite Time Disable

Q NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 46 function, it is suggested that
Nominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for
operation. If other functions operate during these tests they will need to also be disabled for the test
and enabled after the tests are complete.

1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 (MODIFIED) designated above. The modification to
C1 (See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test Setup for configuration) is to exchange Current input 2
and 3 (phase B current = input 3 and phase C current = input 2.)
4. The current pickup level at a percentage setting is: Pickup current = (P% ÷ 100) x (Nominal
Current) where the Nominal Values have been programmed in the system setup data described
in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded on Figure A-2, Communication Data and
Unit Setup Record Form.
5. Test levels may be chosen at any percentages of Nominal Current which are a minimum of 5%
higher than the pickup percentage, P%. (Suggest 4 or 5 test levels chosen and calculated in
amps.)
6. Set the three-phase voltages VA, VB, and VC to the Nominal Voltage.
7. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply currents equal to the
chosen test levels calculated in step 5 and start timing. The operating time will be as read from
Figure 2-11, Negative Sequence Inverse Time Curves, negative sequence current in % of
Nominal Current and appropriate K (Time Dial) setting, or the maximum trip time (whichever is
faster). Repeat this step for all test levels chosen.
8. Reset Time Test: If it is desired to test the reset time, begin timing immediately when the input
current is reduced below the pickup value. Holding the TARGET RESET button in, stop timing
when the TARGET LED goes out. The time should be approximately 4 minutes.
9. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this point.
Q NOTE: If retesting is required, the unit should be powered down or wait 4 minutes before the next
test to assure resetting of the timer.
(For proper testing, use I ≤3 x CT rating)

6–27
M-3425 Instruction Book

50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (1.0 to 240)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 27TN, 32, 51T Disable

Functions 51V, 87, 87GD Disable

Q NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 50 function, it is suggested that
Nominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for
operation. If other functions operate during these tests they will need to also be disabled for the
test and enabled after the tests are complete.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup. Set the three-phase voltages VA, VB, and VC to the Nominal Voltage value.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase current input 3 (C phase)
until the PHASE OVERCURRENT 50 LED light goes on or the pickup indicator operates on the
computer target screen. The current level of operation will be (P) amps ±0.1 amps or ±3%.
Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the current and the OUTPUT LEDs will go
out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately 110% of
P amps and start timing. The operating time will be O2 cycles. Reduce input 3 current to 0
amps.
6. Test may be repeated using inputs 1 (A phase) and 2 (B phase) individually.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–28
 Testing – 6

50BF/50BF-N Breaker Failure

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C2
TEST SETTINGS: 50BF-Ph Pickup P Amps (0.1 to 10)
50BF-N Pickup N Amps (0.1 to 10)
Time Delay D cycles (1 to 8160)
Breaker Failure Initiate B OUT (1 to 8)
I IN (1 to 6)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 32, 50DT, 60FL Disable

Function 87 Disable

Q NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 50BF function, it is suggested that
Nominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for
operation. If other functions operate during these tests they will need to also be disabled for the
test and enabled after the tests are complete.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C2 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup.
4. Testing 50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure Operation: 50BF-N DISABLED, 50BF-Ph
ENABLED, 50BF Pickup Setting = P amps, Time delay setting = D cycles.
5. Initiate operation by externally shorting any ONE set of contacts (I) IN shown above. Short IN1
(connect contacts 10 & 11) to simulate 52b contact closure (breaker open). Alternatively, the
external contact may be operated if all connections are made.
6. Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and slowly increase current input 3 until the 50BF
BREAKER FAILURE LED light goes on (or the pickup indicator operates on the computer
target screen). The current level of operation will be (P) amps ±0.1 amps or ±2%. Release the
TARGET RESET button and decrease the current and the OUTPUT LEDs will go out. Press
TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
7. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately 110% of
P amps and start timing. The operating time will be D cycles within &1 cycle or &1%. Reduce
input 3 current to 0 amps.
8. Testing 50BF-Ph/50BF-N Generator Breaker Failure Operation: 50BF-N ENABLED, 50BF-
Ph ENABLED, 50BF-N Pickup Setting = N amps, 50BF-Ph Pickup Setting < P amps, Time
delay setting = D cycles. (Note: 50BF-Ph setting (P) must be equal to or less than 50BF-N
setting (N).]
9. Short IN1 (connect contacts 10 & 11) to simulate 52b contact closure (breaker open).
10. Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and slowly increase current input 3 until the 50BF
BREAKER FAILURE LED light goes on (or the pickup indicator operates on the computer
target screen). The current level of operation will be (N) amps ±0.1 amps or ±2%. Release the
TARGET RESET button and decrease the current and the OUTPUT LEDs will go out. Press
TARGET RESET button to remove targets.

6–29
M-3425 Instruction Book

11. BFN Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, input approximately 110%
of N amps and start timing. The operating time will be D cycles within &1 cycle or 1%. Reduce
input 3 current to 0 amps.
12. Testing HV Breaker Failure Operation: 50BF-N DISABLED, 50BF-Ph DISABLED, Time delay
set = D cycles, Input 1 in breaker closed state.
13. With output contacts (Z) connected to the timer, initiate operation by externally shorting any ONE
set of contacts (I) IN except Input 1 above. The operating time will be D cycles within &1 cycle or
&1%.
14. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–30
 Testing – 6

50/27 Inadvertent Energizing

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS:Configuration C1

TEST SETTINGS: 50 Pickup P Amps (0.5 to 15)

27 Pickup V Volts (40 to 130)
Pickup Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Dropout Time Delay T Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 21, 27, 27TN Disable

Functions 32, 40, 50BF Disable
Functions 51T, 51V, 87 Disable

1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup.
4. 50 Overcurrent Test: Set Voltage inputs at Zero volts (after a minimum time of D cycles).
Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and slowly increase the Phase A current (Input 1)
until the 50/27 INADVERTENT ENRGNG LED light goes on (or the pickup indicator operates
on the computer target screen). The level of operation will be (P) amps ±0.1 A or ±2%.
5. 27 Undervoltage Test: If desired, the dropout time delay (T) can be set to minimum setting for
this test. Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the voltage input (continuing
current input in step 4.). Wait at least T cycles between each voltage change. The 50/27 LED
will go out at V volts ±0.5 Volts.
6. 27 Pickup Delay Test: Reduce voltage to Zero volts and start timing. The operating time to
close will be D cycles within &1 cycle or 1%.
7. 27 Dropout Delay Test: Increase current by one (1) amp and then with output contacts (Z)
connected to the timer, input approximately 110% of V volts (pickup setting) and start timing.
The operating time to open will be T cycles within &1 cycle or &1%.
8. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–31
M-3425 Instruction Book

50DT Definite Time Overcurrent (for split-phase differential), #1 or #2

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C2
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup A Phase A Amps (0.2 to 240)
Pickup B Phase B Amps (0.2 to 240.0)
Pickup C Phase C Amps (0.2 to 240.0)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Function 50DT (#1 or #2) Disable

Function 50BF Disable

Q NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 50DT function, it is suggested that
Nominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for
operation. If other functions operate during these tests they will need to also be disabled for the
test and enabled after the tests are complete.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C2 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup. Set the three-phase voltages VA, VB, and VC to the Nominal Voltage value.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase current input 1 (A phase)
until the PHASE OVERCURRENT 50 LED light goes on or the pickup indicator operates on the
computer target screen. The current level of operation will be (A) amps ±0.1 amps or ±3%.
Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the current and the OUTPUT LEDs will go
out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately 110% of
P amps and start timing. The operating time will be &1 cycle or &1%, whichever is greater.
Reduce input 3 current to 0 amps.
6. Test may be repeated for phases B & C by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–32
 Testing – 6

50N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: As described
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (1.0 to 240)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 51N, 87GD Disable

Q NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 50N function, it is suggested that
Nominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for
operation. If other functions operate during these tests they will need to also be disabled for the
test and enabled after the tests are complete.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 designated above. Set the three-phase voltages VA, VB, and
VC to the Nominal Voltage value. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test Setup.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase current input IN (terminals
53 and 52) until the NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT 50N LED light goes on or the pickup indicator
operates on the computer target screen. The current level of operation will be (P) amps ±0.1
amps or ±3%. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the current and the OUTPUT
LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately 110% of
P amps and start timing. The operating time will be O 2 cycles. Reduce input 3 current to 0
amps.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–33
M-3425 Instruction Book

51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: As described
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup Inv Time P Amps (0.25 to 12.0)
Curve Characteristic C ( 1, 2, 3 or 4)
Time Dial Setting K (0.5 to 11.0)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT ( 1 to 8)

Function 50N, 87GD Disable

Q NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 51N function, it is suggested that
Nominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for
operation. If other functions operate during these tests they will need to also be disabled for the
test and enabled after the tests are complete.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 designated above. Set the three–phase voltages VA, VB,
and VC to the Nominal Voltage value.
4. Refer to Appendix D, Figures D5–D12, or Tables D-1A and D-1B. Test levels may be chosen in
terms of multiples of pickup value and associated time in seconds. (Suggest 4 or 5 test levels
chosen and calculated in amps.)
5. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to the timer, apply current (IN) to terminals 53
and 52 equal to the chosen test level calculated in step 4 and start timing. Operating time will be
within ±3% or K3 cycles whichever is greater. Repeat this step for all test levels chosen. The
tested points verify the operating times of the function.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–34
 Testing – 6

51T Inverse Time Positive Sequence Overcurrent for Stator Thermal Protection

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.5 to 15.0)
Time Delay T6 Sec (0.1 to 10.0)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 21, 27, 32, 40 Disable

Functions 50, 50/27, 51V Disable
Functions 87, 87GD Disable

Q NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 51T function, it is suggested that
Nominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for
operation. If other functions operate during these tests they will need to also be disabled for the
test and enabled after the tests are complete.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup. Set the three-phase voltages VA, VB, and VC to the Nominal Voltage value.
4. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase positive sequence
current input 3 until the POS SEQ OVERCURRENT 51T LED light goes on or the pickup
indicator operates on the computer target screen. The current level of operation will be (P)
amps ±0.1 amps or ±3%. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the current and
the OUTPUT LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: Calculate trip time using:

36 x T6

( )
Iapp 2

where T6 is the time delay at 6x Pickup (P) and Iapp = applied current.
With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply approximately 110% of P amps and
start timing. The operating time will be as calculated above, &3% or 3 cycles. Reduce input 3
current to 0 amps.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–35
M-3425 Instruction Book

51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent with Voltage Control/Restraint

VOLTAGE INPUTS: V1
CURRENT INPUTS: C1

TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.5 to 12.00)

Inverse Time Curve C (1 to 4)
Time Dial K (0.5 to 11)
Voltage Control Setting V Volts (5 to 180)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 21, 27, 27TN Disable

Functions 32, 40, 46 Disable
Functions 50, 50/27, 51T Disable
Functions 87, 87GD Disable

1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect voltage input in Configuration V1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup for configurations.
4. Test levels may be chosen at any ampere values which are a minimum of 50% higher than the
pickup amps, P Amps. It is suggested that the user select 4 or 5 test levels to verify curve.
5. For VC or Voltage Controlled Units: Set the input voltages at least 5% under the Voltage
Control setting V.
6. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, input current equal to the
chosen test level calculated in step 4 on A phase and start timing. The operating time will be as
read from the appropriate Inverse Curve Family and K (Time Dial) setting in Appendix D, Figures
D-5 through D-8, or Tables D-1A through D-1B. Repeat this step for all test levels chosen. The
accuracy specified is valid for currents above 1.5 times the pickup current.
7. Voltage Control Test: The input voltage may be increased over the Voltage Control setting by at
least 0.5 Volts and the function will dropout.
8. For VR or Voltage Restrained Units: Input Nominal Voltages and test as in steps 4, 5, and 6
above (same current input values). Repeat steps 4, 5, and 6 with reduced input voltage values and
current reduced by the same percentage as value (see Figure 2-14).
9. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–36
 Testing – 6

59 RMS Overvoltage, 3-Phase (#1 or #2)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: None

TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (5 to 180)

Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 27TN, 32 Disable

Function 59 (#1 or #2) Disable

Q NOTE: If 59 #1 and 59 #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one with the
lower setting first and test the higher setting operation. The lower setting operation could then
be tested without disabling the higher setting.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment /Test Setup
for configuration. Set Voltages = Nominal voltage
4. Pickup Test: Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and slowly increase the input voltage
on phase A until 59 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE LED light goes on or the pickup indicator
operates on the computer target screen. The level should be equal to P volts ±0.5 V or ±0.5%*.
Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the input voltage to nominal voltage and the
OUTPUT LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply (P+1) Volts on phase A
and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within 20 cycles (RMS) or &1 cycle or
&1% (DFT).
6. Test phases B and C by repeating steps 4 and 5.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this point.

* When both RMS and Line-Ground to Line-Line is selected, the accuracy is &0.8V or &0.75%.

6–37
M-3425 Instruction Book

59N RMS Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence (#1 or #2)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: See Below

CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (5 to 180)
Time Delay D cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Function 27TN Disable

Function 59N (#1 or #2) Disable

Q NOTE: If 59N #1 and 59N #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one with
the lower setting first and test the higher setting operation. The lower setting operation could
then be tested without disabling the higher setting.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect voltage input to terminal numbers 44 and 45.
4. Pickup Test: Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and slowly increase the input voltage
VN until 59N NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE LED light goes on or the pickup indicator operates on
the computer target screen. The level should be equal to P volts ±0.5 V or ±0.5%. Release the
TARGET RESET button and decrease the input voltage and the OUTPUT LEDs will go out.
Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
5. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply (P+1) Volts and start
timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within &1 cycle or &1%.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this point.

6–38
 Testing – 6

60FL VT Fuse Loss Detection

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1

TEST SETTINGS: Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)

Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Function 27, 27TN, 32, 87 Disable

Q NOTE: It is necessary for “FL” to be designated as an initiating input (see Section 2.3, Setpoints and
Time Settings) before this function can be tested.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup for configurations.
4. Adjust the three-phase voltage source to Nominal volts, and the three-phase current source to
Nominal amps.
5. Time Test: With output contacts connected to the timer, remove the A phase voltage input and
start timing, and the 60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS LED and output Z LEDs will light or the pickup
indicator operates on the computer target screen. The operating time will be D cycles within &1
cycle or &1%.
6. Reconnect the phase A voltage and press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for phases B and C.
8. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–39
M-3425 Instruction Book

64F Field Ground Protection (#1, #2)

VOLTAGE INPUTS:None
CURRENT INPUTS:None

TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P KOhms (5 to 100)

Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Injection Frequency F Hz (0.10 to 1.00)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Function 64B Disable

1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect M-3921 Field Ground Coupler and decade box as shown in Figure 6-14.
4. Set resistance on decade box 10% more than pickup P.
5. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly decrease the resistance on the
decade box until the FIELD GND/BRUSH LIFT 64F/B LED or the pickup indicator on the
IPScom® Function Status screen illuminates. The level of operation will be P kW ±1kW or
±10%. Release the TARGET RESET button and increase the resistance and the OUTPUT
LED(s) will extinguish. Press the TARGET RESET button again to remove targets.
6. Time Test: With output contact (Z) connected to stop the timer, change the resistance on the
decade box to 90% of P and start timing. The operating time will be after D cycles, within
±(2/IF + 1).
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–40
 Testing – 6

Once the capacitance value and the operating frequency have been determined, the actual insulation
resistance can be verified by installing a variable resistor (5 to 100 KW) and discrete capacitor to the
coupler module (M-3921).

M-3425

60 to 100 V dc source - simulates

PROCESSOR Exciter Supply Voltage

DC Supply
Field Ground
Detection

Squarewave Vout 3
Generator 37 5
Coupling
35 4 Network 2
Signal
M-3921
Measurement Rf Cf*
Vf
and
Processing
36 1 1
Discrete Capacitor to
simulate Field Winding
Rear Terminal
Capacitance
Block Pin No.

Decade Box or Discrete Resistor

to simulate Fault Resistance

* If the rotor is NOT connected, the value of Cf should approximate

the rotor capacitance. If the rotor is connected Cf is NOT required.

Figure 6-14 Field Ground Coupler

6–41
M-3425 Instruction Book

64B Brush Lift-Off Detection

VOLTAGE INPUTS:None
CURRENT INPUTS:None

TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P mV (0 to 5000)

Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Injection Frequency IF Hz (0.10 to 1.00)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Function 64F Disable

1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect M-3921 Field Ground Coupler and decade box as shown in Figure 6-14, set Rf to open
(infinity) and Cf to 1μf.
4. Monitor the FIELD GND MEAS. CIRCUIT display under the VOLTAGE menu in MONITOR
STATUS. Set the pickup (P) to 110% of the displayed value.
5. Pickup Test: Hold the TARGET RESET button in and open Cf and the FIELD GND/BRUSH
LIFT 64F/B LED or the pickup indicator on the IPScom® Function Status screen will illuminate.
Connect the capacitor Cf before starting the timing test. Press the TARGET RESET button
again to remove targets.
6. Time Test: With output contact (Z) connected to stop the timer, remove the capacitance
connected to the decade box and start timing. The operating time will be after D cycles, within
±(2/IF + 1) sec.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–42
 Testing – 6

78 Out of Step

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS:Configuration C1

TEST SETTINGS: Diameter P ohms (0.1 to 100)

Offset O ohms (–100 to +100)
Impedance Angle A Degrees (0 to 90)
Time Delay D cycles (1 to 8160)
Blinder Impedance B ohms (0.1 to 50.0)
Trip on MHO Exit See Below
Programmed Output Z

Delta-Y Transform Disable

Functions 21, 27, 27TN Disable
Functions 32, 40, 51V Disable
Functions 81, 87 Disable

Q NOTE: Use Figure 2-18 for reference. A stopwatch is required for this test.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure
Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup for configurations. Adjust voltage and currents while monitoring the positive sequence
impedance to a point similar to point Z0 in Figure 2-17.
4. Pickup Test: Disable the TRIP ON MHO EXIT setting and set the delay, D, to a minimal
setting. Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and sweep the current angle towards point
Z1. When the impedance passes through point Z1, verify that the 78 OUT OF STEP LED comes
on or the function status indicator shows the function picked up on the Monitor Function
Status screen. Pause testing until the delay timer has time to expire. Continue to sweep the
current angle to point Z2, and verify output Z operates as point Z2 is crossed, and resets after
the seal-in time delay.
Blocking on Stable Swing Test: Reset impedance to a point outside of the mho circle. Adjust
voltages and currents to point Z0. Press and hold the TARGET RESET button and sweep past
point Z1. Verify the 78 OUT OF STEP LED comes on or the function status indicator shows the
function picked up on the Monitor Function Status screen. Pause testing until the delay timer
has time to expire. Reverse sweep direction and sweep the current angle to point Z1, and verify
output Z does not operate and the 78 OUT OF STEP LED goes out or the function status
indicator shows the function reset on the Monitor Function Status screen as point Z1 is
crossed.
5. Pickup Test (Trip on mho Exit): Enable the TRIP ON MHO EXIT setting. Adjust voltages and
currents to point Z0. Press and hold the TARGET RESET button, and sweep the current angle
towards point Z1. When the impedance passes through point Z1, verify that the 78 OUT OF
STEP LED comes on or the function status indicator shows that the function has picked up on
the Monitor Function Status screen. Pause testing until the delay timer has time to expire.
Continue to sweep the current angle to point Z2, and verify that output Z does not operate as
point Z2 is crossed. Sweep the impedance further towards point Z3, and verify output Z
operates as point Z3 is crossed, and resets after the seal-in time delay.

6–43
M-3425 Instruction Book

81 Frequency (#1, #2, #3, #4)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Hz (50 to 67)
Time Delay D cycles (2 to 65,500)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Function 24, 27TN, 81R Disable

Q NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the functions with the settings nearest to nominal frequency first
(testing over or underfrequency functions).
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test Setup
for configuration.
4. Pickup Test: Set the voltages VA, VB, and VC to nominal voltage (nominal frequency). For
overfrequency testing, hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly increase the frequency
on the input voltage(s) until the appropriate FREQUENCY/ROCOF 81/81R LED light goes on or
the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. The level will be equal to P Hz
±0.02 Hz only if P is within 3 Hz of Fnom, otherwise, &0.1 Hz. Return to nominal input frequency
and OUTPUT LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets. For
underfrequency testing, decrease the input frequency and return to nominal after operation.
5. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply (P+ or – 0.5) Hz and start
timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within &2 cycles or &1%, whichever is greater.
6. Complete the testing for all 81 functions by repeating the appropriate steps for each one.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this point.

6–44
 Testing – 6

81R Rate of Change of Frequency (#1, #2)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: V1
CURRENT INPUTS:None
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Hz/Sec (0.10 to 20)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Negative Sequence
Voltage Inhibit N % (0 to 99)
Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)
Functions 24, 27TN Disable
Function 81 See Below

Q NOTE: Testing of the 81R function requires a 3-phase voltage source capable of smoothly sweeping
the frequency of all voltages at a variable rate, continuously.
1. Disable functions as shown. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure
Relay Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 designated previously. Refer to Section 6.1, Equipment/
Test Setup for configuration.
4. It is recommended that the 81 function be used to establish a window of operation for the 81R
function which is smaller than the actual sweep range of the frequency applied. This is
accomplished by enabling 81#1 to pickup at a frequency 1 Hz higher than the minimum
frequency of the ramp, and assign a unique output. Set 81#2 to pickup 1 Hz lower than the
maximum frequency of the ramp, and assign a unique output (see figure below). The frequencies
given are suggested for testing rates below 10 Hz/Sec. Higher rates will require consideration of
the capabilities of the test equipment involved. Connect both of these outputs to an input with
jumpers, and set the 81R function to block on this input. Set the time delays and seal-in times of
the 81 functions to minimum. This will result in an operational window that is free of erroneous
Hz/Sec measurements when the voltage source begins or ends the sweep.

F81#1 Block 81R Active Region F81#2 Block

56.5 Hz 57.5 Hz 60 Hz 62.5 Hz 63.5 Hz

Using this setup, it is important to remember that the 81 elements being used will be operating
in the 81R blocking regions, and the 81R contact operation must be distinguished from the 81
contacts.
5. Pickup Test: Apply Nominal Voltage to all three phases. Calculate the time for the pickup
setting and apply a sweep rate 25% less than the pickup (P) to all three phases.
Hold the TARGET RESET button in and slowly decrease the sweep time until the FREQUENCY/
ROCOF 81/81R LED lights, or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. The
level should be equal to P &0.05 Hz/S or &5 %. Release the TARGET RESET button, and
increase the sweep time, and the OUTPUT LED will go out.

6–45
M-3425 Instruction Book

6. Negative Sequence Voltage Inhibit Test: Reset targets and apply Nominal Voltage to all three
phases at a sweep rate 25% above P. Verify that the FREQUENCY/ROCOF 81/81R LED lights,
or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. Swing the phase angle of a
phase voltage and monitor the positive and negative sequence voltage levels. The 81R
OUTPUT should reset when the negative sequence voltage is N%, &0.5% of the positive
sequence voltage.
7. Timer Test: Reset targets and apply Nominal Voltage to all three phases at a sweep rate 25%
below P. With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply a sweep rate 25% above P
and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within 20 cycles, or K3 %.
8. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If further testing is desired,
check the proper functions to disable for the next test and continue from this point.

6–46
 Testing – 6

87 Phase Differential

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C3
TEST SETTINGS: Minimum Pickup P Amps (0.2 to 3.0)
Percent Slope S % (1 to 100)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 21, 32, 40 Disable

Functions 46, 50, 50/27 Disable
Functions 50DT, 50N Disable
Functions 51T, 51V, 87GD Disable
Q NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 87 function, it is suggested that
Nominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for
operation. If other functions operate during these tests, they will need to also be disabled for the
test and enabled after the tests are complete.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect inputs in Configuration V1 and C3 as designated above. See Section 6.1,
Equipment/Test Setup for configuration. Set Voltages = Nominal voltage.
4. Minimum Pickup Test: Set Ia = 0 Amps (input 1); press and hold the TARGET RESET button
and slowly increase IA (input 2) until the PHASE DIFF CURRENT 87 LED light goes on (or the
pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen). The current level of operation will be
equal to P amps ±0.1 A or ±5%. Release the TARGET RESET button and decrease the current
and the OUTPUT LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets. Each
phase may be tested individually or IA and Ia may be exchanged.
5. Timer Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply at least 10% higher IA
(input 2) current than the minimum pickup level and start timing. The contacts will close after D
cycles within +1 to -2 cycles or 1%. When the Time Delay is set to 1 cycle, the relay operation is
less than 1-1/2 cycles.
6. Slope Test: Define any number of testing points desirable to verify the trip curve. Choosing any
values for Ia (input 1), calculate the expected operating current IA (input 2) according to the
following:

(IA-Ia) > (IA+Ia) x Slope/100 ÷2

Difference in currents is greater than sum of the currents times the per unit slope ÷2
or IA = [(1+K) ÷ (1-K)] x Ia where K = S/200 and where S is % slope input above.
Q NOTE: For tests above the restraint current {(IA+Ia)/2} value of 2X Nominal Current; use a slope % value
equal to 4 times the input slope value (S) for these computations.
7. With Ia (input 1) and IA (Input 2) set at the chosen value, hold the TARGET RESET button in and
slowly increase either current until the PHASE DIFF CURRENT 87 LED light goes on or the
pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen. The current level of operation will
equal to IA within ±0.1 A or ±2% slope calculation. Release the TARGET RESET button and
decrease the larger CURRENT and the OUTPUT LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET
button to remove targets. Note that the difference in current must be greater than minimum
pickup current for proper operation.
8. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–47
M-3425 Instruction Book

87GD Ground Differential

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: As described
TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.2 to 10)
Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
CT Ratio Correction (0.10 to 7.99)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Functions 21, 46, 50/27 Disable

Functions 50N, 51N, 51T Disable
Functions 51V, 87 Disable

Q NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 87GD function, it is suggested that
Nominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for
operation. If other functions operate during these tests they need to be disabled for the test and
enabled after the tests are complete.
1. Disable functions as shown. See Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay
Data, for procedure.
2. Confirm settings to be tested.
3. Connect voltage input in Configuration V1 as designated above. See Section 6.1, Equipment/Test
Setup for configuration V1. Set Voltages = Nominal voltage
4. Non–Directional Pickup Test: With IA=IB=IC= 0 Amps; press and hold the TARGET RESET
button and slowly increase IN (terminals 53 and 52) until the GND DIFF CURRENT 87GD LED
light goes on (or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen). The current level
of operation will be equal to P amps ±0.1 A or &5%. Release the TARGET RESET button and
decrease the current and the OUTPUT LEDs will go out. Press TARGET RESET button to
remove targets.
5. Timer Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, apply at least 10% higher IN
(terminals 53 and 52) current than the minimum pickup level and start timing. The contacts will
close after D cycles within –1 to +3 cycles.
6. Directional Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to the timer, apply IN=1.0 A @ Zero
degrees and IA or IB or IC @ P–0.9 A @180 degrees and start timing. The contacts will close after
D cycles within &1 cycle or &1%. Remove currents and reset targets. Reverse either current
input (current inputs now in phase) and retest. The relay will not operate. If the IA or IB or IC
current input value is reduced to 140 ma or less and the difference current exceeds the pickup
value, the relay will operate regardless of polarities of the currents.
7. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–48
 Testing – 6

External Functions (#1 OR #2)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: None

CURRENT INPUTS: None
TEST SETTINGS: Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)
Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)
Initiating Inputs I IN

1. Confirm initiating input numbers.

2. Time Test: With output contacts (Z) connected to stop the timer, either short out input terminals
designated or actually close external initiating contacts (one at a time) and start timing. The
operating time will be D cycles within &1 cycle or &1% and the EXTERNAL EXT LED and
output Z LEDs will light or the pickup indicator operates on the computer target screen.
3. Blocking Input Test: To test the designated blocking inputs, press and hold the TARGET
RESET button, and short (see step 2) input terminals (one at a time) designated as blocking
inputs. The EXTERNAL EXT LED will go out.
4. Open initiating contact and press TARGET RESET button between contact closures to remove
targets.
5. Repeat for each designated external triggering contact.
6. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test. If other tests are to be
completed, check the proper functions to disable for the next test and proceed from this
configuration.

6–49
M-3425 Instruction Book

This Page Left Intentionally Blank

6–50
 Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A

A Appendix A

Configuration Record Forms

This Appendix contains photocopy–ready forms for Figure A-3, Functional Configuration Record Form
recording the configuration and setting of the M-3425 reproduces the Configure Relay menus. For each
Generator Protection Relay. The forms can be function or setpoint, refer to the configuration you
supplied to field service personnel for configuring have defined using the Relay Configuration Table,
the relay, and kept on file for future reference. and circle whether it should be enabled or disabled,
the output contacts it will activate, and the inputs
A copy of the Relay Configuration Table (Table that will block its operation.
A-1) is provided to define and record the blocking
inputs and output configuration. For each function; Figure A-4, Setpoint & Timing Record Form allows
check the D (disabled) column or check the output recording of the specific values entered for each
contacts to be operated by the function, and check enabled setpoint or function. The form follows the
the inputs designated to block the function main menu selections of the relay.
operation.
Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be
Figure A-2, Communication Data & Unit Setup visible within the menus. If a function is DISABLED,
Record Form reproduces the Communication and the input/output screens for that function will not
Setup unit menus. This form records definition of be displayed.
the parameters necessary for communication with
the relay, as well as access codes, user logo lines,
date & time setting, and front panel display operation.

A–1
M-3425 Instruction Book

D O U T P U T S I N P U T S
FUNCTION
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
27
2
1
27TN
2
1
59
2
1
59N
2
DEF
46
INV
50
50/27
50BF
1
50DT
2
50N
51N
51T
51V
87
87GD
1
2
81
3
4
1
81R
2
1
24
2
24
1
32
2
1
40
2
60F L
Check each box applicable : ✓
1 (See page A-1 for information on using
21
2 this table.)
78 D Column = Function Disabled.
64B OUTPUTS Columns =Designated function
output(s)
64F
fl Column = Function blocked by fuse loss.
1
EXT INPUTS Columns =Designated function
2 blocking input(s)
Table A-1 Relay Configuration Table

A–2
 Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A

KEY TO INPUT DATA RECORD FORMS

A. All unshaded screens shown on forms require data inputs. Whatever is in that
screen when ENTER button is pushed (see Figure A-1) will be installed in the relay.
B. All heavy bordered screens are either MENU screens which have horizontal
choices (made with right - left arrows) or screens displaying a result of a choice previously
made.
C. Dotted boxes enclose screens which bound areas that pushbutton ENTER
will move in. In order to move out of one of the dotted boxes it is necessary to either push EXIT
or make a menu choice change using the Right - Left arrow.
D. The Up/Down arrows only adjust value or letter (lower/upper case) inputs; they do not move
within the menus or between menu displays.
E. The Right/Left arrows are used only to make horizontally displayed choices. These can be
either menu choices or input value digit choices. The previous choice or location in a menu is
highlighted immediately.
F. The ENTER pushbutton records the setting change and moves down within a menu. The
operator will notice that after the last menu item, ENTER moves to the top of the same menu but
does not change menu positions.
G. Pushing EXIT at any time will exit the display screen to the last screen containing a horizontal
choice. (Return to the preceding menu).

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.

M-3425
a

a
a
a

EXIT ENTER

Figure A-1 Human-Machine Interface Module

H. The symbol or in a screen indicates additional horizontal menu choices are available in the
indicated direction. As previously described, the Right and Left arrows will move the operator to
those additional choices.

A–3
 M-3425 Instruction Book

SETUP UNIT CLEAR OUTPUT COUNTERS

SETUP exit logo1 logo2 OUT alrm
COMMUNICATION
targets osc_rec COMM SOFTWARE VERSION CLEAR OUTPUT COUNTERS
VERS sn access number PRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR
COM1 SETUP
COM1 com2 com3 com-adr SOFTWARE VERSION
D-0070V__.__.__ CLEAR ALARM COUNTER
COM1 BAUD RATE
300 600 1200 logo1 logo2 out ALRM
baud_4800 BAUD_9600 SERIAL NUMBER CLEAR ALARM COUNTER
vers SN access number PRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR
COM2 SETUP SERIAL NUMBER
com1 COM2 com3 com_adr ________ DATE & TIME
TIME error diag
COM1 BAUD RATE
300 600 1200 ALTER ACCESS CODES DATE & TIME
baud_4800 BAUD_9600 vers sn ACCESS number 01-Jan-2001 12:00:00

COM2 DEAD SYNC TIME ENTER ACCESS CODE DATE & TIME
________ MS LEVEL#1 level#2 level#3 ________ YEAR

COM2 PROTOCOL LEVEL #1 DATE & TIME

beco2200 MODBUS ________ JAN feb mar apr may
jun jul aug sep oct
COM2 PARITY ENTER ACCESS CODE nov dec
none odd even level#1 LEVEL#2 level#3
DATE & TIME
LEVEL #2 ________ DATE
COM3 SETUP ________
com1 com2 COM3 com_adr DATE & TIME
ENTER ACCESS CODE sun mon tue wed thu
COM3 DEAD SYNC TIME level#1 level#2 LEVEL#3 fri sat
________ MS
LEVEL #3 DATE & TIME
COM3 PROTOCOL ________ ________ HOUR
beco2200 MODBUS
DATE & TIME
COM3 PARITY USER CONTROL NUMBER ________ MINUTES
NONE odd even vers sn access NUMBER
DATE & TIME
USER CONTROL NUMBER ________ SECONDS
COMMUNICATION ADDRESS ________
com1 com2 com3 COM_ADR
CLEAR ERROR CODES
COMMUNICATION ADDRESS USER LOGO LINE 1 time ERROR diag
________ LOGO1 logo2 out alrm
CLEAR ERROR CODES
USER LOGO LINE 1 PRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR
COMM ACCESS CODE ________
ACCSS
USER LOGO LINE 2 DIAGNOSTIC MODE
COMM ACCESS CODE logo1 LOGO2 out alrm time error DIAG
________
USER LOGO LINE 2
________

A–4
Figure A-2 Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form
 CONFIGURE RELAYS Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A
CONFIG sys stat

CONFIGURE RELAY
VOLTAGE_RELAY

27 #1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE 59N #1 NEUTRAL OVERVOLT 50/27 INADVERTANT ENRGNG

disable enable disable enable disable enable

27 #1 BLOCK INPUT 59N #1 BLOCK INPUT 50/27 BLOCK INPUT

fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

27 #1 RELAY OUTPUT 59N #1 RELAY OUTPUT 50/27 RELAY OUTPUT

o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

27 #2 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE 59N #2 NEUTRAL OVERVOLT

disable enable 50BF BREAKER FAILURE
disable enable disable enable
27 #2 BLOCK INPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 59N #2 BLOCK INPUT 50BF BLOCK INPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
27 #2 RELAY OUTPUT
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 59N #2 RELAY OUTPUT 50BF RELAY OUTPUT
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
27TN #1 NEUTRL UNDERVOLT
disable enable CONFIGURE RELAY 50DT#1 DEF TIME OVERCURR
CURRENT_RELAY disable enable
27TN #1 BLOCK INPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
50DT#1 BLOCK INPUT
46DT NEG SEQ CURRENT DEF fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
27TN #1 RELAY OUTPUT
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 disable enable
50DT#1 RELAY OUTPUT
27TN #2 NEUTRL UNDERVOLT 46DT BLOCK INPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
disable enable fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
50DT#2 DEF TIME OVERCURR
27TN #2 BLOCK INPUT 46DT RELAY OUTPUT disable enable
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
50DT#2 BLOCK INPUT
27TN #2 RELAY OUTPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 46IT NEG SEQ CURRENT INV
disable enable 50DT#2 RELAY OUTPUT
59 #1 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
46IT BLOCK INPUT
disable enable fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 50N NTRL INST OVERCURRNT
59 #1 BLOCK INPUT disable enable
46IT RELAY OUTPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 50N BLOCK INPUT
59 #1 RELAY OUTPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 50 INST OVERCURRENT
disable enable 50N RELAY OUTPUT
59 #2 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
disable enable
50 BLOCK INPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
59 #2 BLOCK INPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
50 RELAY OUTPUT
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 Q NOTE: Unpurchased or un-
59 #2 RELAY OUTPUT available functions will not be
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 visible within the menus.

Figure A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form (1 of 4) A–5

 M-3425 Instruction Book

CONFIGURE RELAY CONFIGURE RELAY CONFIGURE RELAY

CURRENT_RELAY FREQUENCY_RELAY VOLTS_PER_HERTZ_RELAY

81 #1 FREQUENCY 24DT #1 VOLTS/HZ DEF

disable enable disable enable
51N NTRL OVERCURRNT INV
disable enable 81 #1 BLOCK INPUT 24DT #1 BLOCK INPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
51N BLOCK INPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 81 #1 RELAY OUTPUT 24DT #1 RELAY OUTPUT
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
51N RELAY OUTPUT
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 81 #2 FREQUENCY 24DT #2 VOLTS/HZ DEF
disable enable disable enable
51T STATOR THERM. PROT.
81 #2 BLOCK INPUT 24DT #2 BLOCK INPUT
disable enable
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
51T BLOCK INPUT
81 #2 RELAY OUTPUT 24DT #2 RELAY OUTPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
51T RELAY OUTPUT
81 #3 FREQUENCY
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 24IT VOLTS/HZ DEF
disable enable
disable enable
51V OVERCURRENT INV 81 #3 BLOCK INPUT
24IT BLOCK INPUT
disable enable fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
51V BLOCK INPUT 81 #3 RELAY OUTPUT
24IT RELAY OUTPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
51V RELAY OUTPUT 81 #4 FREQUENCY
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 disable enable
CONFIGURE RELAY
POWER_RELAY
81 #4 BLOCK INPUT
87 DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
disable enable 32 #1 DIRECTIONAL POWER
disable enable
81 #4 RELAY OUTPUT
87 BLOCK INPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 32 #1 BLOCK INPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
81R #1 RATE OF CHNG FREQ
87 RELAY OUTPUT disable enable
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 32 #1 RELAY OUTPUT
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
81R #1 BLOCK INPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
87GD GND DIFFERENTIAL 32 #2 DIRECTIONAL POWER
disable enable disable enable
81R #1 RELAY OUTPUT
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
87GD BLOCK INPUT 32 #2 BLOCK INPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
81R #2 RATE OF CHNG FREQ
disable enable
87GD RELAY OUTPUT 32 #2 RELAY OUTPUT
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
81R #2 BLOCK INPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
Q NOTE: Unpurchased or un-
81R #2 RELAY OUTPUT available functions will not be
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 visible within the menus.

A–6 Figure A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form (2 of 4)

 Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A

CONFIGURE RELAY CONFIGURE RELAY CONFIGURE RELAY

LOSS_OF_FIELD_RELAY PHASE DISTANCE_RELAY EXTERNAL_RELAY

40 #1 LOSS OF FIELD 21 #1 PHASE DISTANCE EXT #1 EXTERNAL

disable enable disable enable disable enable

40 #1 BLOCK INPUT 21 #1 BLOCK INPUT EXT #1 BLOCK INPUT

fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

40 #1 RELAY OUTPUT 21 #1 RELAY OUTPUT EXT #1 RELAY OUTPUT

o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

40 #2 LOSS OF FIELD 21 #2 PHASE DISTANCE EXT #2 EXTERNAL

disable enable disable enable disable enable

40 #2 BLOCK INPUT 21 #2 BLOCK INPUT EXT #2 BLOCK INPUT

fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

40 #2 RELAY OUTPUT 21 #2 RELAY OUTPUT EXT #2 RELAY OUTPUT

o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

78 OUT OF STEP
CONFIGURE RELAY
disable enable
V.T._FUSE_LOSS_RELAY
78 BLOCK INPUT
60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
disable enable
78 RELAY OUTPUT
60FL BLOCK INPUT
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

60FL RELAY OUTPUT

o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
CONFIGURE RELAY
FIELD_GND_RELAY

64F#1 FIELD GROUND 64B BRUSH LIFTOFF

disable enable disable enable

64F #1 BLOCK INPUT 64B BLOCK INPUT

fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

64F #1 RELAY OUTPUT 64B RELAY OUTPUT

o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
Q NOTE: Unpurchased or un-
available functions will not be 64F #2 FIELD GROUND
visible within the menus. disable enable

64F #2 BLOCK INPUT

fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

64F #2 RELAY OUTPUT

o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

Figure A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form (3 of 4) A–7

 M-3425 Instruction Book

SETUP SYSTEM
config SYS stat

NOMINAL VOLTAGE 50DT SPLIT-PHASE OPERATE V.T. PHASE RATIO

VOLT curr vt d_ytx rot mag SPLT plse seal in VT vt_n ct ct_n

NOMINAL VOLTAGE SPLIT-PHASE OPERATE V.T. PHASE RATIO

________ Volts enable disable ________ :1

NOMINAL CURRENT PULSE RELAY V.T. NEUTRAL RATIO

volt CURR vt d_ytx rot mag splt PLSE seal in vt VT_N ct ct_n

NOMINAL CURRENT PULSE RELAY V.T. NEUTRAL RATIO

________ Amps o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 ________ :1

V.T. CONFIGURATION RELAY SEAL-IN TIME C.T. PHASE RATIO

volt curr VT d_ytx rot mag splt plse SEAL in vt vt_n CT ct_n

V.T. CONFIGURATION RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT1 C.T. PHASE RATIO

line_line line_ground
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
________ Cycles ________ :1
line_gnd_to_line_line
RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT2
________ Cycles C.T. NEUTRAL RATIO
DELTA-Y TRANSFORM VT vt_n ct CT_N
volt curr vt D_YTX rot RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT3
________ Cycles C.T. NEUTRAL RATIO
DELTA-Y TRANSFORM ________ :1
disable enable RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT4
________ Cycles
OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER
PHASE ROTATION RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT5 targets OSC_REC comm
volt curr vt d_ytx ROT ________ Cycles
RECORDER SETUP
PHASE ROTATION RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT6 stat clear SETUP
a-c-b a-b-c ________ Cycles
RECORDER PARTITIONS
RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT7 ________
59/27 MAGNITUDE SELECT ________ Cycles
MAG splt plse seal in TRIGGER INPUTS
RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT8 i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
59/27 MAGNITUDE SELECT ________ Cycles
rms dft TRIGGER OUTPUTS
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
ACTIVE INPUT STATE
mag splt plse seal IN POST TRIGGER DELAY
________ %
ACTIVE INPUT OPEN/close
i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

A–8
Figure A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form (4 of 4)
 Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A

VOLTAGE RELAY 50 INST OVERCURRENT

VOLT curr freq v/hz neg_seq INST

27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE 59 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE 50 PICKUP

PHASE_UNDER PHASE_OVER ________ Amps

27 #1 PICKUP 59 #1 PICKUP
________ Volts ________ Volts 50/27 INADVERTANT ENRGNG
INADVTNT_ENG brk_fail
27 #1 DELAY 59 #1 DELAY
________ Cycles ________ Cycles 50/27 PICKUP
________ Amps
27 #2 PICKUP 59 #2 PICKUP
________ Volts ________ Volts 50/27 VOLTAGE CONTROL
________ Volts
27 #2 DELAY 59 #2 DELAY
________ Cycles ________ Cycles 50/27 PICKUP DELAY
________ Cycles

27TN NEUTRAL UNDERVOLT 59N NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE 50/27 DROPOUT DELAY

NUTRL_UNDER NUTRL_OVER ________ Cycles

27TN #1 PICKUP 59N #1 PICKUP

________ Volts ________ Volts 50BF BREAKER FAILURE
inadvtnt_eng BRK_FAIL
27TN #1 DELAY 59N #1 DELAY
________ Cycles ________ Cycles 50BF NEUTRAL ELEMENT
disable enable
27TN #1 VOLT INHIBIT 59N #2 PICKUP
________ Volts ________ Volts 50BF PICKUP NEUTRAL
________ Amps
27TN #1 POWER INHIBIT 59N #2 DELAY
disable enable ________ Cycles 50BF PHASE ELEMENT
disable enable
27TN #1 POWER INHIBIT
________ PU CURRENT RELAY 50BF PICKUP PHASE
volt CURR freq v/hz ________ Amps
27TN #2 PICKUP
________ Volts 46 NEG SEQ OVERCURRENT 50BF INPUT INITIATE
NEG_SEQ inst i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
27TN #2 DELAY
________ Cycles 46DT PICKUP 50BF OUTPUT INITIATE
________ % o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
27TN #2 VOLT INHIBIT
________ Volts 46DT DELAY 50BF DELAY
________ Cycles ________ Cycles
27TN #2 POWER INHIBIT
disable enable 46IT PICKUP
________ %
27TN #2 POWER INHIBIT
________ PU 46IT TIME DIAL Q NOTE: If a function is DISABLED,
________ the input screens for that function will
not be displayed. Unpurchased or
46IT MAX DELAY unavailable functions will not be
________ Cycles
visible.

Figure A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form (1 of 4) A–9

 M-3425 Instruction Book

FREQUENCY RELAY
CURRENT RELAY volt curr FREQ v/hz
volt CURR freq v/hz 51T STATOR THERM. PROT.
T_INV v_inv diff 81 FREQUENCY
50DT DEF TIME OVERCURR FREQ rcfreq
P_INST n_inst n_inv 51T PICKUP
________ Amps 81 #1 PICKUP
50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE A ________ Hz
________ Amps 51T DELAY @600% PICKUP
________ Sec 81 #1 DELAY
50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE B ________ Cycles
________ Amps
51V INV TIME OVERCURRENT 81 #2 PICKUP
50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE C t_inv V_INV diff ________ Hz
________ Amps
51V PICKUP 81 #2 DELAY
50DT #1 DELAY ________ Amps ________ Cycles
________ Cycles
51V CURVE 81 #3 PICKUP
50DT #2 PICKUP PHASE A def inv vinv einv ________ Hz
________ Amps ieci iecvi iecei ieclti
81 #3 DELAY
50DT #2 PICKUP PHASE B 51V TIME DIAL ________ Cycles
________ Amps ________
81 #4 PICKUP
50DT #2 PICKUP PHASE C 51V VOLTAGE CONTROL ________ Hz
________ Amps disable v_cntrl v_rstrnt
81 #4 DELAY
50DT #2 DELAY 51V VOLTAGE CONTROL ________ Cycles
________ Cycles ________ Volts

81R RATE OF CHNG FREQ

87 DIFFERENTIAL OVERCURR freq RCFREQ
50N INST OVERCURRENT
p_inst N_INST n_inv t_inv v_inv DIFF
81R #1 PICKUP
87 PICKUP ________ Hz/s
50N PICKUP
________ Amps ________ Amps
81R #1 DELAY
87 SLOPE ________ Cycles
51N INV TIME OVERCURRENT ________ %
81R #2 PICKUP
p_inst n_inst N_INV ________ Hz/s
87 DELAY
51N PICKUP ________ Cycles
81R #2 DELAY
________ Amps ________ Cycles
51N CURVE 87GD GND DIFF OVERCURR
G_DIFF 81R NEG SEG VOLT INHIBIT
def inv vinv einv ________ %
ieci iecvi iecei ieclti
87GD PICKUP
51N TIME DIAL ________ Amps
________ Q NOTE: If a function is DISABLED,
87GD DELAY the input screens for that function will
________ Cycles not be displayed. Unpurchased or
unavailable functions will not be
87GD C.T. RATIO CORRECT visible.
________

A–10 A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form (2 of 4)

 Configuration Record Forms: Appendix – A

VOLTS PER HERTZ RELAY POWER RELAY V.T. FUSE LOSS RELAY
volt curr freq V/HZ PWR lof fuse dist pwr lof FUSE dist

24 DEF TIME VOLTS/HERTZ 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER 60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS

DEF_V/HZ inv_v/hz PWR FUSE

24DT #1 PICKUP 32 #1 PICKUP 60FL INPUT INITIATE

________ % ________ PU FL i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

24DT #1 DELAY 32 #1 DELAY 60FL DELAY

________ Cycles ________ Cycles ________ Cycles

24DT #2 PICKUP 32 #1 LOW FORWARD POWER

________ % PHASE DISTANCE RELAY
disable enable
pwr lof fuse DIST
24DT #2 DELAY 32 #2 PICKUP
________ Cycles ________ PU 21 PHASE DISTANCE
DIST ostp
32 #2 DELAY
24 INV TIME VOLTS/HERTZ ________ Cycles 21#1 DIAMETER
def_v/hz INV_V/HZ ________ Ohms
32 #2 LOW FORWARD POWER
24IT #1 PICKUP disable enable 21#1 OFFSET
________ % ________ Ohms

24IT CURVE LOSS OF FIELD RELAY 21#1 IMPEDANCE ANGLE

crv1 crv2 crv3 crv4 pwr LOF fuse dist ________ Degrees

24IT TIME DIAL 40 LOSS OF FIELD 21#1 DELAY

________ LOF
________ Cycles

24IT RESET RATE 40 #1 DIAMETER

________ Ohms 21#2 DIAMETER
________ Seconds ________ Ohms
40 #1 OFFSET
________ Ohms 21#2 OFFSET
________ Ohms
40 #1 VOLTAGE CONTROL
disable enable 21#2 IMPEDANCE ANGLE
________ Degrees
40 #1 DELAY
________ Cycles 21#2 DELAY
________ Cycles
40 #2 DIAMETER
________ Ohms
Q NOTE: If a function is
DISABLED, the input screens 40 #2 OFFSET
for that function will not be ________ Ohms
displayed. Unpurchased or
unavailable functions will not be 40 #2 VOLTAGE CONTROL
visible. disable enable

40 #2 DELAY
________ Cycles

40 VOLTAGE CONTROL
________ Volts

Figure A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form (3 of 4) A–11

 M-3425 Instruction Book

PHASE DISTANCE RELAY EXTERNAL RELAY

FIELD GROUND RELAY
pwr lof fuse DIST FIELD stator ext rotor stator EXT

78 OUT OF STEP
64B/F FIELD GROUND EXTERNAL
dist OSTP EXT
FIELD
78 DIAMETER EXT #1 INPUT INITIATE
________ Ohms 64F #1 PICKUP
________ kOhm i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

78 OFFSET EXT #1 DELAY

________ Ohms 64F #1 DELAY
________ Cycles
________ Cycles
78 BLINDER IMPEDANCE EXT #2 INPUT INITIATE
________ Ohms 64F # 2 PICKUP i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
________ kOhm
78 IMPEDANCE ANGLE EXT #2 DELAY
________ Degrees 64F # 2 DELAY ________ Cycles
________ Cycles
78 DELAY
________ CYCLES 64B PICKUP
________ mV
78 TRIP ON MHO EXIT
disable enable 64B DELAY
________ Cycles
Q NOTE: If a function
78 POLE SLIP COUNT is DISABLED, the input
________ Slips 64B/F FREQUENCY
________ Hz screens for that func-
tion will not be dis-
78 POLE SLIP RESET TIME played. Unpurchased
________ Cycles
or unavailable func-
tions will not be visible.

Figure A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form (4 of 4)

A–12
 Communications: Appendix – B

B Appendix B

Communications

The M-3425 Generator Protection Relay incorporates 5. Only the following MODBUS commands
three serial ports for intelligent, digital communication are supported:
with external devices. Equipment such as RTU's, a. read holding register (function 03)
data concentrators, modems, or computers can be
interfaced for direct, on-line, real time data b. read input register (function 04)
acquisition and control. Generally, all data available c. force single coil (function 05)
to the operator through the front panel of the relay d. preset single register (function 06)
with the optional M-3931 Human-Machine Interface
module is accessible remotely through the BECO For detailed information on IPScom
2200 or MODBUS data exchange protocol. These communications, refer to Chapter 4, Remote
protocol documents and the database-specific Operation.
protocol document are available from the factory or
from our website at www.beckwithelectric.com. Communication Ports
®
The M-3820A IPSCom Communication Software The relay has both front and rear panel RS-232
package has been supplied for communication to ports and a rear RS-485 port. The front and rear
any IBM compatible computer running under panel RS-232 ports are 9-pin (DB9S) connector
Microsoft® Windows 95 or higher. configured as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) per
the EIA-232D standard. Signals are defined in
The communcation protocols implement serial, byte Table B-1, Communication Port Signals .
oriented, asynchronous communication and can be
used to fulfill the following communications The 2-wire RS-485 port is assigned to the rear
functions: panel terminal block pins 3 (–) and 4 (+).

• Real time monitoring of line status. Each communication port may be configured to
• Interrogation and modification of setpoints. operate at any of the standard baud rates (300,
600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600). The RS-485
• Downloading of recorded oscillograph data. port shares the same baud rate with COM 2 (for
• Reconfiguration of relay functions. COM1 see Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches
and Jumpers).
Q NOTE: The following restrictions apply for
MODBUS protocol use: While the digital communication ports do include
some ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) protection
1. MODBUS protocol is not supported on circuitry, they are excluded from passing ANSI/
COM1. IEEE C37.90.1-1989. Beckwith Electric
recommends the use of RS-232/485 to fiber optic
2. Parity is supported on COM2 and COM3; converters to avoid any question of surge-withstand
valid selections are 8,N,2; 8,O,1 or 8,E,1. capability or ground potential rise.
3. ASCII mode is not supported (RTU only).
A null modem cable is also shown in Figure B-1,
4. Standard baud rates from 300 to 9600
Null Modem Cable: M-0423, if direct connection
are supported.
to a PC (personal computer) is desired.

B–1
M-3425 Instruction Book

Circuit Signal COM 1 COM 2

BB RX Receive Data Pin 2 Pin 2
BA TX Transmit Data Pin 3 Pin 3
CA RTS Request to Send Pin 7 Pin 7
CB CTS Clear to Send Pin 8
CD DTR Data Terminal Ready Pin 4 Pin 4
CF DCD Data Carrier Detect Pin 1*
AB GND Signal Ground Pin 5 Pin 5
+15 V Pin 1*
- 15 V Pin 9*
TTL IRIG- B (+) Pin 6*
* Opt ional: See Sect ion 5.4, Circuit Board Swit ches and Jumpers &15V
(&15%) @100 mA max imum.

Table B-1 Communication Port Signals

Q NOTE: Also see Tables 5-1, 5-2 and Figure 5-7.

M-3425
COM1/COM2 PC
DB9P DB9S
1 1 DCD
RX 2 2 RX
TX 3 3 TX

4 4 DTR
SGND 5 5 SGND
6 6 DSR

RTS 7 7 RTS
CTS 8 8 CTS

9 9 RI

Figure B-1 Null Modem Cable: M-0423

B–2
 Communications: Appendix – B

PC Master

Echo Cancel On

25 pin or
9-25 pin Straight-Through Cable

DYMEC Fiber Optic

Link / Repeater
DCE
DTE

REP
OFF

T R

FOC FOC

FOC FOC

R T R T R T

DCE DCE DCE

DTE DTE DTE

REP REP REP

OFF OFF OFF

Slave #1 Slave #2 Slave #3

Address 1 Address 2 Address 3

RS-232 RS-232 RS-232

9-25 pin "Straight-Through" Cables

Figure B-2 RS-232 Fiber Optic Network

B–3
M-3425 Instruction Book

RS-485 2-Wire Network

Slave #1 Slave #2 Slave #3
Address 6 Address 8 Address 1

- + - +
PC Master

B(-) 200 Ω*
A(+)

Twisted
RS-232 to RS-485 2-wire
converter or RS-485 PC Card

▲ CAUTION: Due to the possibility of ground potential difference between units, all units should be mounted
in the same rack. If this is not possible, fiber optics with the appropriate converters should be used for
isolation.
Q NOTE: Each address on the network must be unique. Only the last physical slave on the network should
have the termination resistor installed. This may be completed externally or via a dip jumper
internal to the unit. See Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers.

Figure B-3 RS-485 Network

B–4
 Self-Test Error Codes Appendix – C

C Appendix C
Self-test Error Codes
Error Code De s cription

2 Battery backed RAM test fail

3 EEPROM write power- up fail

4 EEPROM read back power- up fail

5 Dual port RAM test fail

6 EEPROM write calibration checksum fail

7 EEPROM write setpoint checksum fail loss of power

8 EEPROM write setpoint checksum fail loss of battery backed RAM

9 DMA checksum/physical block fail

10 Oscillograph Memory Test fail

11 DSP external program RAM fail

12 DSP A/D convert fail

13 DSP ground channel fail

14 DSP reference channel fail

15 DSP PGA gain fail

16 DSP DSP<- > HOST interrupt 1 fail

17 DSP DSP - > HOST interrupt 2 set fail

18 DSP DSP - > HOST interrupt 2 reset fail

19 DSP program load fail

20 DSP not running run mode code

21 DSP not running secondary boot code

22 DSP DPRAM pattern test fail

23 EEPROM write verify error

24 BBRAM test error

25 Uninitialized EEPROM

Table C-1 Self-Test Error Codes

C–1
M-3425 Instruction Book

Error Code De s cription

26 WARNING calibration checksum mismatch warning

27 WARNING setpoint checksum mismatch warning

28 WARNING low battery (BBRAM) warning

29 Supply/mux PGA running test fail

30 External DSP RAM test fail

31 Unrecognized INT1 code

32 Values update watchdog fail

33 Abort Error

34 Restart Error

35 Interrupt Error

36 Trap Error

37 Calibration running check fail

38

39

40 Interrupt noise INT2

41 Interrupt noise INT1

42

43

44 Oscillograph buffer overflow

45 Oscillograph buffer underflow

46 Failure of DSP to calculate calibration phasors

47 Unable to calibrate input (gain)

48 Unable to calibrate input (phase)

49

50 Stack Overflow

51 Setpoint Write Overflow

52 Field Ground Error

Table C-1 Self-Test Error Codes (continued)

C–2
 Self-Test Error Codes Appendix – C

Error Code De s cription

An incorrect pass word supplied to the control will result in this

Comm Channel Lock
message.

This message indicates that the control is being operated locally

Control in Local Mode
and serial communication is suspended.

This error results if there are problems with the communication

Echo Timeout
link or if the echo cancel function is used incorrectly.

Invalid Data This error results if incorrect or out- of- range data is entered.

This message is displayed when attempting to communicate with a

Invalid ID
device other than the M- 3425.

This error results if an incompatible version of IPScom software is

Invalid Number of
used. This is a communication protocol error. Contact a Beckwith
Points
Electric Co. factory representative.

This error results if an incompatible version of IPScom software is

Invalid Point Number used. This is a communication protocol error. Contact a Beckwith
Electric Co. factory representative.

This error results if there are problems with the communication

Read Invalid Checksum
link or if the echo cancel function is used incorrectly.

This error results when communication with the control is lost

Read Packet Timeout
while attempting to read data to the control.

This error results when communication with the control is lost

Response Timeout
while attempting to read data from the control.

Unknown System Error This error could be caused by a malfunction of the control.

User Cancel This message displays when the escape (ESC) key is pressed.

This error results if there are problems with the communication

Write Invalid Checksum
link or if the echo cancel function is used incorrectly.

This error results when communication with the control is lost

Write Packet Timeout
while attempting to write data to the control.

®
Table C-2 IPScom Error Messages

C–3
M-3425 Instruction Book

This Page Left Intentionally Blank

C–4
 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D

D Appendix D

Inverse Time Curves

This Appendix contains two sets of Inverse Time Q NOTE: Table D-1A and D-1B on pages D–6 and
Curve Families. The first set is used for Volts per D–7 contains a list of the data that
Hertz functions (Figures D-1 through D-4), and the characterizes Definite Time, Inverse
second set is for the M-3425 functions which utilize Time, Very Inverse Time, and Extremely
the Inverse Time Overcurrent curves (Figures D-5 Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves.
through D-12).

D–1
M-3425 Instruction Book

Figure D-1 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Curve Family #1 (Inverse Square)

D–2
 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D

Figure D-2 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Family Curve #2

D–3
M-3425 Instruction Book

Figure D-3 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Curve Family #3

D–4
 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D

Figure D-4 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Curve Family #4

D–5
M-3425 Instruction Book

M ultiple of Tap Se tting De finite Time Inve rs e Time Ve ry Inve rs e Time Extre me ly Inve rs e Time

1.50 0.69899 4.5395 4 3.46578 4 . 8 3 5 20

1.55 0.64862 4.15533 3.11203 4.28747

1.60 0.60539 3.81903 2 . 8 12 2 8 3 . 8 3 5 62

1.65 0.56803 3.52265 2.5565 4 3.45706

1.70 0.53558 3.25987 2.33607 3 . 13 5 7 3

1. 7 5 0.50725 3.02558 2 . 14 4 3 1 2.85994

1. 8 0 0.48245 2.81566 1.97620 2 . 6 2 0 94

1.85 0.46068 2.62673 1.82779 2 . 4 12 0 8

1.90 0.44156 2.4559 9 1.69597 2 . 2 2 8 22

1.95 0.42477 2.30111 1.57823 2 . 0 6 5 29

2.00 0.41006 2.16013 1.47254 1.92006

2.05 0.39721 2.03139 1.37723 1.78994

2.10 0.38606 1.91348 1.29093 1.67278

2.15 0.37648 1.80519 1. 2 12 4 9 1.56686

2.20 0.3655 4 1. 7 2 2 5 7 1.12812 1.47820

2.30 0.3529 3 1. 5 4 0 9 4 1.01626 1.32268

2.40 0.34115 1.39104 0.92207 1.19250

2.50 0.33018 1. 2 6 5 6 1 0 . 8 4 19 0 1.08221

2.60 0.31999 1.15945 0.77301 0 . 9 8 7 80

2.70 0.31057 1. 0 6 8 7 1 0 . 7 13 3 4 0 . 9 0 6 26

2.80 0.30189 0.9904 9 0 . 6 6 12 7 0 . 8 3 5 27

2.90 0.2939 2 0.92258 0 . 6 15 5 4 0 . 7 7 3 03

3.00 0.2866 6 0.86325 0.57515 0.71811

3.10 0.28007 0.81113 0.53930 0.66939

3.20 0.27415 0.76514 0.50733 0.62593

3.30 0.2688 9 0.72439 0.47870 0.58700

3.40 0.2642 7 0 . 6 8 8 18 0.45297 0 . 5 5 19 6

3.50 0.2603 0 0.6559 1 0.42977 0.52032

3.60 0.2569 7 0 . 6 2 7 10 0.40879 0 . 4 9 16 3

3.70 0.2542 9 0.60135 0.38977 0.46554

3.80 0.2522 9 0.57832 0.3724 8 0 . 4 4 17 5

4.00 0.24975 0.53904 0 . 3 4 10 2 0 . 4 0 12 9 Q NOTE: The above times

are in seconds and are
4.20 0.24572 0.5064 1 0 . 3 15 2 8 0 . 3 6 5 64
given for a time dial of
4.40 0.24197 0.4774 6 0.2933 2 0.33460 1.0. For other time dial
4.60 0.23852 0.45176 0.27453 0 . 3 0 7 41
values, multiply the above
by the time dial value.
4.80 0.2354 1 0.4289 4 0.25841 0 . 2 8 3 46

Table D-1A M-3425 Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves (1 of 2)

D–6
 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D

M ultiple of Tap Se tting De finite Time Inve rs e Time Ve ry Inve rs e Time Extre me ly Inve rs e Time

5.00 0.23266 0.4087 1 0.24456 0.26227

5.20 0.23029 0.39078 0 . 2 3 2 69 0.24343
5.40 0.22834 0.37495 0 . 2 2 2 54 0.22660
5.60 0.22684 0 . 3 6 10 2 0.21394 0.21151
5.80 0.22583 0.34884 0 . 2 0 6 73 0.19793
6.00 0.22534 0.33828 0.20081 0.18567
6.20 0.22526 0. 3 2 7 7 1 0.19511 0.17531
6.40 0.22492 0 . 3 19 3 9 0.19044 0.16586
6.60 0.22360 0.31150 0.18602 0.15731
6.80 0.22230 0.30402 0.18187 0.14957
7.00 0 . 2 2 10 2 0.2969 5 0.17797 0.14253
7.20 0 . 2 19 7 7 0.2902 7 0.17431 0.13611
7.40 0 . 2 18 5 5 0.2839 8 0.17090 0.13027
7.60 0 . 2 17 3 6 0.2780 7 0.16773 0.12492
7.80 0 . 2 16 2 1 0.27253 0.16479 0.12003
8.00 0 . 2 15 1 0 0.26734 0.16209 0.11555
8.20 0 . 2 14 0 3 0.26251 0.15961 0.11144
8.40 0.21300 0.2580 3 0.15736 0.10768
8.60 0.21203 0.2538 8 0.15534 0.10422
8.80 0.21111 0.2500 7 0.15354 0.10105
9.00 0.21025 0.2466 0 0.15197 0.09814
9.50 0.20813 0.2393 5 0.14770 0 . 0 9 0 70
10.00 0.20740 0.23422 0.14473 0 . 0 8 4 74
10.50 0.20667 0.22923 0.14180 0.07943
11.00 0.20594 0. 2 2 4 42 0.13894 0 . 0 7 4 69
11.50 0 . 2 0 5 21 0 . 2 19 7 9 0.13615 0.07046
12.00 0.20449 0.21536 0.13345 0 . 0 6 6 67
12.50 0.20378 0.21115 0.13084 0 . 0 6 3 29
13.00 0.20310 0.20716 0.12833 0 . 0 6 0 26
13.50 0.20243 0.2034 1 0.12593 0 . 0 5 7 55
14.00 0 . 2 0 17 9 0 . 19 9 9 1 0.12364 0.05513
14 . 5 0 0.20119 0 . 19 6 6 6 0.12146 0.05297
15.00 0.20062 0 . 19 3 6 7 0.11941 0.05104
15.50 0.20009 0 . 19 0 9 5 0.11747 0 . 0 4 9 34
16.00 0.19961 0 . 18 8 5 1 0.11566 0 . 0 4 7 84
16 . 5 0 0 . 19 9 1 8 0.18635 0.11398 0 . 0 4 6 52
17.00 0 . 19 8 8 1 0.18449 0.11243 0 . 0 4 5 39
17.50 0 . 19 8 5 1 0.18294 0.11102 0 . 0 4 4 42 Q NOTE: The above times
18.00 0.19827 0.18171 0.10974 0 . 0 4 3 62 are in seconds and are
18 . 5 0 0.19811 0 . 18 0 8 2 0.10861 0.04298
given for a time dial of 1.0.
For other time dial values,
19.00 0.19803 0 . 18 0 2 9 0.10762 0 . 0 4 2 50
multiply the above by the
19.50 0 . 19 8 0 3 0 . 18 0 1 4 0.10679 0.04219 time dial value.
20.00 0 . 19 8 0 3 0 . 18 0 1 4 0.10611 0.04205

Table D-1B M-3425 Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves (2 of 2)

D–7
M-3425 Instruction Book

Figure D-5 Definite Time Overcurrent Curve

D–8
 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D

Figure D-6 Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve

D–9
M-3425 Instruction Book

Figure D-7 Very Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve

D–10
 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D

Figure D-8 Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve

D–11
M-3425 Instruction Book

100

10

1.1
1
0.9
Time in Seconds

0.8
0.6
1
0.4

0.2

0.1 .05

0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiple of Pickup

t=TD x [M
0.14
0.02
-1 ]
Figure D-9 IEC Curve #1 Inverse

D–12
 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D

100

10
Time in Seconds

K
1 1.1
1
0.9
0.8
0.6

0.4

0.2
0.1

.05

0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiple of Pickup

[M-1 ]
13.5
t=TD x

Figure D-10 IEC Curve #2 Very Inverse

D–13
M-3425 Instruction Book

100

10
Time in Seconds

K
1.1
1
0.9
0.8
0.1
0.6
0.4

0.2

0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 .05
Multiple of Pickup

[M -1 ]
80
t=TD x 2

Figure D-11 IEC Curve #3 Extremely Inverse

D–14
 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D

1000

100
Time in Seconds

K
10
1.1
1
0.9
0.8
0.6

0.4

1 0.2

.05

0.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiple of Pickup

[M-1 ]
120
t=TD x

Figure D-12 IEC Curve #4 Long-Time Inverse

D–15
M-3425 Instruction Book

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

D–16
 Appendix E – Layup and Storage

E Appendix – Layup and Storage

Appendix E includes the recommended storage Layup of the M-3425 requires verifying that the
parameters, periodic surveillance activities and layup system clock is stopped. The steps necessary to
configuration for the M-3425 Generator Protection verify system clock status are as follows:
Relay
▲ CAUTION: Do not use the diagnostic mode in
relays that are installed in an active protection
Storage Requirements (Environment) scheme.
The recommended storage environment parameters
for the M-3425 are: For units with the optional HMI panel:
• The ambient temperature where the 1. Verify that the Power Supply (PS) fuses
M-3425 is stored is within a range of 5° C are installed.
to 40° C
2. Determine the unit power supply rating
• The maximum relative humidity is less by observing the check box below the
than or equal to 80% for temperatures up PS terminals on the rear of the unit.
to 31° C, decreasing to 31° C linearly to
50% for relative humidity at 40° C. 3. Apply power to the unit consistant with
the rating determined in Step 2 (see
• The storage area environment is free of Figure 5-5, External Connections). The
dust, corrosive gases, flammable unit will enter the selftest mode.
materials, dew, percolating water, rain and
solar radiation. 4. When the selftests are complete, then
press ENTER to begin main menu.

Storage Requirements (Periodic Surveillance 5. Press the right arrow pushbutton until
During Storage) SETUP UNIT is displayed.
The M-3425 power supply contains electrolytic 6. Press ENTER to access the SETUP
capacitors. It is recommended that power be applied UNIT menu.
to the relay (PS1 and optional PS2 redundant power 7. Press the right arrow pushbutton until
supply when installed) every three to five years for DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed.
a period of not less than one hour to help prevent
the electrolytic capacitors from drying out. 8. Press ENTER. A reset warning will be
displayed:
Layup Configuration PROCESSOR WILL RESET!
The M-3425 includes a removable lithium battery ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE
backed TIMEKEEPER® module (Beckwith Electric
component U25, Figure 5-7). The TIMEKEEPER WARNING: All relay functions and protection
module is the M-3425 real-time clock and also will be inoperative while the relay is in diagnostic
provides power to the unit’s nonvolatile memory mode.
when power is not applied to the unit.
9. Press ENTER. Unit will now reset and
DIAGNOSTIC MODE will be temporarily
displayed, followed by OUTPUT TEST
(RELAY). This is the beginning of the
diagnostic menu.

E–1
M-3425 Instruction Book

10. Press the right arrow pushbutton until 4. Install IPSutil TM Communications
the following is displayed: Software (see Section 4.7, IPSutil
Communications Software) on a PC that
CLOCK TEST includes the following:
I com1 com2 com3 CLOCK
• Microsoft WindowsTM 95 Operating
11. Press ENTER. The following is System or above
displayed: • Equipped with a serial port
CLOCK TEST 5. Connect a null modem cable from COM1
03-JAN-1998 09:00:00.000 of the relay to the PC serial port.
IPSutil supports COM1 port direct
12. If the clock is running, press ENTER to connection only. IPSutil is not supported
stop the clock. The following is through COM2 or COM3 ports.
displayed:
6. Open the IPSutil software.
CLOCK TEST
-CLOCK STOP- 7. Select “Comm” from the menu bar and
then select “Connect”. IPSutil will display
the “Communication Dialog Screen”
NOTE: When the relay clock is stopped, the
Figure 4-24.
seconds will be displayed as 80.
8. Verify that the PC COM port that the
13. Press ENTER and verify the relay clock null modem cable is connected to is
is stopped. A display similar to the selected in the “PC Port”.
following is shown with the seconds
stopped: 9. Select “Open COM”, IPSutil will connect
to the unit and then return to the IPSutil
CLOCK TEST Main Screen.
03-JAN-09:01:80.000 10. Select “Clock” from the menu bar. IPSutil
will display the “Unit Date/Time Dialog
14. When the clock has been verified to be Screen Figure 4-26.
stopped, then press EXIT until the
following message appears: 11. Verify that “Start Clock” is displayed,
then proceed as follows:
PRESS EXIT TO
EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE a. If “Start Clock” is displayed, then
select “Save” and go to Step 12.
15. Press EXIT again to exit DIAGNOSTIC b. If “Stop Clock” is displayed, then
MODE. The relay will reset and normal select “Stop Clock” and then select
running mode will resume. “Save”.
NOTE: Pressing any button other than EXIT will 12. Close communications with the unit by
return the user to DIAGNOSTIC MODE. selecting “Comm” from the menu bar
and then select “Exit”.
16. Remove power from the unit. The unit 13. Disconnect the null modem cable and
can now be placed in storage. then remove power from the unit. The
unit can now be placed in storage.

For units without the optional HMI panel:

Storage of the M-3425 greater than five years may
1. Verify that the Power Supply (PS) fuses require replacement of the lithium battery prior to
are installed. placing the unit in service. Contact Beckwith Electric
2. Determine the unit power supply rating Customer Service for replacement procedure.
by observing the check box below the
PS terminals on the rear of the unit.
3. Apply power to the unit consistant with
the rating determined in Step 2 (see
Figure 5-5, External Connections). The
unit will enter the selftest mode.

E–2
 Legal Information
Patent Indemnification
The Seller shall not be liable for any property
The units described in this manual are covered by damages whatsoever or for any loss or damage
U.S. Patents, with other patents pending. arising out of, connected with, or resulting from
Buyer shall hold harmless and indemnify the Seller, this contract, or from the performance or breach
its directors, officers, agents, and employees from thereof, or from all services covered by or furnished
any and all costs and expense, damage or loss, under this contract.
resulting from any alleged infringementof United In no event shall the Seller be liable for special,
States Letters Patent or rights accruing thereform or incidental, exemplary, or consequential damages,
trademarks, whether federal, state, or common law, including but not limited to, loss of profits or
arising from the Seller’s compliance with Buyer’s revenue, loss of use of the equipment or any
designs, specifications, or instructions. associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of
purchased power, cost of substitute equipment,
facilities or services, downtime costs, or claims or

Warranty damages of customers or employees of the Buyer

for such damages, regardless of whether said claim
or damages is based on contract, warranty, tort
Seller hereby warrants that the goods which are the including negligence, or otherwise.
subject matter of this contract will be manufactured
Under no circumstances shall the Seller be liable
in a good workmanlike manner and all materials
for any personal injury whatsoever.
used herein will be new and reasonably suitable for
the equipment. Seller warrants that if, during a It is agreed that when the equipment furnished
period of five years from date of shipment of the hereunder are to be used or performed in connec-
equipment, the equipment rendered shall be found tion with any nuclear installation, facility, or
by the Buyer to be faulty or shall fail to peform in activity, Seller shall have no liability for any
accordance with Seller’s specifications of the nuclear damage, personal injury, property damage,
product, Seller shall at his expense correct the or nuclear contamination to any property located at
same, provided, however, that Buyers shall ship the or near the site of the nuclear facility. Buyer agrees
equipment prepaid to Seller’s facility. The Seller’s to indemnify and hold harmless the Seller against
responsibility hereunder shall be limited to replace- any and all liability associated therewith whatso-
ment value of the equipment furnished under this ever whether based on contract, tort, or otherwise.
contract. Nuclear installation or facility means any nuclear
reactor and includes the site on which any of the
Seller makes no warranties expressed or implied
foregoing is located, all operations conducted on
other than those set out above. Seller specifically
such site, and all premises used for such opera-
excludes the implied warranties of merchantibility
tions.
and fitness for a particular purpose. There are no
warranties which extend beyond the description
contained herein. In no event shall Seller be liable for
consequential, exemplary, or punitive damages of
Notice:
whatever nature. Any illustrations and descriptions by Beckwith
Any equipment returned for repair must be sent Electric Co., Inc. are for the sole purpose of
with transportation charges prepaid. The equipment identification.
must remain the property of the Buyer. The afore- The drawings and/or specifications enclosed herein
mentioned warranties are void if the value of the are the proprietary property of Beckwith Electric
unit is invoiced to the Seller at the time of return. Co., Inc., and are issued in strict confidence;
therefore, shall not be used as a basis of reproduc-
tion of the apparatus described therein without
written permission of Beckwith Electric Co., Inc.
No illustration or description contained herein
shall be construed as an express warranty of
affirmation, promise, description, or sample, and
any and all such express warranties are specifically
excluded nor shall such illustration or description
imply a warranty that the product is merchantable
or fit for a particular purpose. There shall be no
warranties which extend beyond those contained in
the Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. terms of sale.

All rights reserved by Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. No reproduction may be made without prior written approval
of the Company.
This Page Left Intentionally Blank
 BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC.
6190 - 118th Avenue North • Largo, Florida 33773-3724 U.S.A.
PHONE  (727) 544-2326 • FAX  (727) 546-0121
[email protected]
www.beckwithelectric.com
ISO 9001:2008

© 1998 Beckwith Electric Co. 800‑3425‑IB‑02MC15 08/15

Printed in USA